Home

The 1999 Pontiac Grand Prix Owner`s Manual

1. 00000 1 5 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 20 Recovery Tank Coolant 0000 5 14 Recreational Vehicle Towing 00 0 4 31 Refrigerants Air Conditioning 6 68 Remote Keyless Ehtty spere stets dr hr eee ry ER ose es 2 8 Trunk Release esa tre ty me e ER Ie 2 22 Replacement Bulbs 212i espe bRRPRUURAUESS Na galas cee 6 66 PANS 1 tea oraret nde oo voe deum qom qi tdt dus 6 68 Wheel 266i xg E bo eon E REX REE Tq 6 49 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash 1 53 Replacing Safety Belts 0 00000005 1 53 Reporting Safety Defects 0000 8 12 Restraints Checking seriis ee Re ERE ini EEE i 1 53 gini pM Y 1 38 Head eec nto tn eh mee Oe Ue eyed 1 6 Replacing Parts After a Crash 1 53 System Check pees erer emm eere ete 7 15 Top Strap sie et edem pm PIER CERA 1 43 Resynchronization Keyless Entry Transmitter 2 11 Retained Accessory Power 0 0e eee eeeaee 2 27 Reverse Automatic Transaxle 005 2 33 Right Front Passenger Position sess 1 22 Roadside Assistance 0 00 cee eee eee eee 8 8 Roadside Assistance Canadian 000005 8 9 Rocking Your Vehicle 0 00 00 eese 5 34 yellow blue Rotation Ties ss e905 scsscerae e ERREUR COPA dee 6 45 Safety Belt Extender 2k re Re 1 53 Safety Belts 2
2. 4 39 Unaerboay Flushing Service 000 7 17 Underbody Maintenance 00005 6 57 Underhood Electrical Center Passenger s Side 6 63 Vehicle Control scsi gs cst shee EREGU vex bx RR UIS 4 5 Damage Warnings 00 0 cence eee eee eee iv DIMENSIONS 1 23 enint Ereta EERE RE 6 68 Identification Number 0 002000 6 59 Loading 24a rhe ee ah URP 4 32 9 12 yellow blue Recreational Towing 0 000 0008 4 31 StOfage jl s e ep a t er Er RESE yes 6 35 Ventilation System sees 3 9 Visor Vanity Mirrors 2 0 0 eee eee ee eee 2 63 Misors SUN seconirerir ieira r RES bea er E EDS 2 63 Warning DEVICES os redu ke ER ener bEIQEEYA 5 2 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 2 70 Warranty Information 000 00 ee eee 8 11 Washer Fluid Low Light sil ih Seca g Re etiem 2 87 2 90 Windshield Rer edet 6 31 Washing Your Vehicle 0 00 00 ee eee 6 55 Weatherstrips errereen atom dmn cete hem 6 55 Wheel Alignment i SLRERLe R Re RESI EE P b EYES 6 48 Nut Torque eek er seme Ree eae ea 5 30 Replac ment 23 oh eb Rete a Mid ardeat 6 49 Wiench 22s er hr eee REESE 5 24 Widows seeria nanie REPE ETE p EE ERE 2 45 Windows Power 0 00 ccc eee eee eee 2 45 Windshield Washer 0 0 0 0 eee ee eee 2 48 Fluid 65 05 Se ate bee LE ERE EE HR aie E 6 31 Fluid Level Check cereo s 7 14 Win
3. esses 2 61 Content Theft Deterrent System 2 24 Arming Confirmation eese 2 25 Arming with the Power Lock Switch 2 24 Arming with the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter 2 25 Disarming with the Key 05 2 25 Disarming with the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter 0 00 cee eee eee eee 2 25 Nuisance Alarms 0 0 0 c ee eee eae 2 25 Control Loss Of cio p RR Y tants bee ee okies RE EE S 4 16 bh d x cT 4 5 Convenience Net 0 00 cee eee eee eee ee 2 62 Convex Outside Mirror 0000 00 00 0 00 2 58 Coolants easi sch annie tele DE e iw aod cicer 6 26 PROUD senes rem ett uh hagas E RE iQ Pd 6 28 yellow blue Checking e dnpRSRP CT pede P4 Ee Re ec 6 28 Heater Engine 2 1 nba tetter a hia DS 2 30 Recovery Tank sereneco nenir nea pieis eaaa 5 14 Temperature Gage 0 0 eee eee eee 2 80 What to Use 5 s usse e RR e meme ead 6 27 Cooling System 0 0 eee eee eee 5 12 Courtesy amps cooker k ree deter e 2 54 Courtesy Transportation 000000000 8 10 Cruise Control 0 20 eee eee ee eee 2 49 Customer Assistance 0 00 e eee eee eee 8 1 Hearing Impaired 0000 00 8 5 Information o exe cha cena e E bee eat E 8 1 Speech Impaired eor er tb reete cen 8 5 Text Telephone Users 0 0 00 0 00008 8 5 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 8 3 Damage PRX ek
4. 6 33 Brake Wear Your vehicle has four wheel disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won t work well That could lead to an accident When you hear the brake wear warning sound have your vehicle serviced NOTICE Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair 6 34 yellow blue Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM specifications Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets See Brake System Inspection in Section 7 of this manual under Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign of brake trouble Brake Adjustment Every time you apply the brakes with or without the vehicle moving your brak
5. Give the valet key to the valet Then take the master key with you 2 23 Content Theft Deterrent If Equipped The vehicle may have a theft deterrent alarm system A red light located on top of the instrument panel near the center of the vehicle in front of the windshield will flash slowly when the system is armed 2 24 yellow blue While armed the doors will not unlock with the power door lock switch The alarm will sound if someone damages the vehicle tampers with the trunk lock enters the vehicle without using the remote keyless entry transmitter or key to unlock the doors or turns the ignition on The horn will sound and the headlamps will flash for up to two minutes The system will also cut off the fuel supply preventing the vehicle from being driven Arming with the Power Lock Switch Your alarm system can be programmed to arm when you use either power lock switch to lock the doors while any door is open and the key is removed from the ignition If you would like to arm the system with the power lock switch see Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index The SECURITY light flashes quickly to let you know when the system is ready to arm with the power door lock switches When you press the rear of the power lock switch the SECURITY light will stop flashing and stay on to let you know the system is arming After all doors are closed and locked the SECURITY light will begin flashing a
6. 5 29 Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off This could lead to an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts If you have to replace them be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 Ib ft 140 N m NOTICE Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification 5 30 yellow blue Don t try to put the wheel cover on your compact spare tire It won t fit Store the wheel cover in the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced NOTICE Wheel covers won t fit on your compact spare If you try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare you could damage the cover or the spare Storing the Flat Tire and Tools Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place After yov ve put the compact spare tire on your vehicle you ll need to store the flat tire in your trunk Use the following procedure to secure the flat tire in the trunk When storing a full size tire you must use the extension to help avoid wheel surfa
7. Next Generation frontal air bags one air bag for the driver and another air bag for the right front passenger Next Generation frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating air bag But even these air bags must inflate very quickly if they are to do their job and comply with federal regulations 1 22 yellow blue Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you aren t wearing your safety belt even if you have air bags Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Air bags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts All air bags even Next Generation air bags are designed to work with safety belts but don t replace them Air bags are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something They aren t designed to inflate at all in rollover rear side or low speed frontal crashes And for unrestrained occupants Next Generation air bags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have provided in the past Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there s an air bag for that person Air bags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye If you re too close to an inflating air bag
8. The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to Federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards 6 47 Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades r
9. To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393 or 366 0123 in the Washington D C area or write to NHTSA U S Department of Transportation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline 8 12 yellow blue REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should immediately notify Transport Canada in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited You may write to Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Tower C Ottawa Ontario K1A ON5 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO GENERAL MOTORS In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this we certainly hope you ll notify us Please call us at 1 800 PM CARES or write Pontiac GMC Customer Assistance Center P O Box 436008 Pontiac MI 48343 6008 In Canada please call us at 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French Or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 yellow blue Ordering Service and Owner Publications in Canada Service manuals owner s manuals and other service literature are available for purchase for all current and past model General Motors vehicles The toll free telephone number for ordering information in Canada is 1 800 668 5539
10. 0 0 0 0 eee eee 6 5 In the Ram ese a aee tarde Rk Yn ae oe 4 18 Night 2 5 pert v RUPES PEE ERCE AERE RIS 4 17 On CUEPVeS 56 oe erated Ow crite oa AU rete seed 4 12 On Grades While Towing a Trailer 4 39 On Hill and Mountain Roads 4 25 On Snow and Ice sii esera g ea par E eens 4 28 Through Water sese 4 21 Wet Roads 2 eese orate reme Qum o etei 4 18 Winter ss b laura e e Gb suis RR ERU edo diete 4 27 With a Trailer seeeeeeeee e 4 37 DRE ecciesie lv ord paite tene Ah gussets neces 2 52 Drunken Driving pess cee te iiie eee eee eee eee 4 3 Electrical Equipment Adding 3 26 6 60 Electrical System i cog eh an RR Hep Rah ea 6 60 Electrochromic Day Night Rearview Mirror 2 57 Engine 3 sss eene gar ee er 6 10 6 11 6 12 Air Cleaner Filter 2 0 0 0 0 6 20 Coolant 5653 3 5 ed VE ex be 9E EP RO RRS ra 6 26 9 4 yellow blue Coolant Heater si sis ck pedis o re Rr me 2 30 Coolant Level Check 00000000000 7 14 Coolant Temperature Gage 00000 2 80 Coolant Temperature Light 2 79 Exhaust RR EP RU ELI 2 22 2 43 4 30 Fuse Block Passenger s Side suu 6 63 Identification dece e Res Ree Pa 6 59 Oil Level Check pee ea px dem ie 7 14 Overheated Protection Operating Mode 5 9 Overheating inei sre ied th YR PETER 5 9 Running While Parked 0 00005 2
11. 3800 Supercharged Engine When you start the engine the trip computer will display a mode A lighted oval will appear to the left of the mode currently being used 2 89 Control Buttons The trip computer has three buttons that control its functions ENG MET Press this button to change the display from English to metric units or metric to English RESET Press this button for two seconds to reset the mode displayed MODE Press this button to change the mode being displayed Functions PERFORMANCE SHIFT This light comes on when you press the performance shift button located on the console shift to indicate that the vehicle is in performance shifting mode See Performance Shifting in the Index FUEL USED Shows the total amount of fuel used since you last reset this mode The amount can be displayed in gallons or liters 2 90 yellow blue AVG ECON Shows the average fuel economy since you last reset this mode OIL LIFE Shows a percentage of the oil s remaining useful life The system predicts remaining oil life using inputs from length of drives coolant temperature engine rpm and vehicle speed Each time you get an oil change be sure to reset this function so that it will give you an accurate percentage See How to Reset the Oil Life Monitor in the Index RANGE Shows how much farther you can travel with the fuel you have before refueling When the range displays L for 40 to 50 miles 64 36 to 80
12. AM Cicerone Locations call Puerto Rico 1 787 763 1315 GMODC Customer Communication Centre 169 007 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Telephone 905 644 4112 Fax 905 644 4866 GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 toward aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle hand controls wheelchair scooter lifts etc yellow blue This program can also provide you with free resource information such as area driver assessment centers and mobility equipment installers The program is available for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease See your dealer for more details or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 When calling from the United States please dial 1 905 644 3063 Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program Security While You Travel 1 800 ROADSIDE 1 800 762 3743 As the proud owner of a new Pontiac vehicle you are automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside yellow blue Assistance program This value added service is intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive in the city or travel the open road Pontiac s Roadside Assistance toll free number is
13. If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle wait your turn But take care that someone isn t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot yellow blue Check your mirrors glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane Remember that your right outside mirror is convex The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two lane roads Reconsider before passing the next vehicle Don t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly Even though the brake lamps are not flashing it may be slowing down or starting to turn If you re being passed make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you Perhaps you can ease a little to the right 4 15 Loss of Control Let s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration don t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency don t give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose con
14. in the Index If you are parking on a hill and if you re pulling a trailer also see Towing a Trailer in the Index Power Windows Switches on the driver s door armrest control each of the windows when the ignition is on In addition each passenger door has a switch for its own window yellow blue The driver s window switch has an auto down feature This switch is labeled AUTO Tap the rear of the switch and the driver s window will open a small amount If the rear of the switch is pressed all the way down and released the window will go all the way down To stop the window while it is lowering press the front of the switch To raise the window press and hold the front of the switch On four door models the driver s window controls also include a lock out switch Push LOCK OUT to stop front and rear passengers from using their window switches The driver can still control all the windows with the lock on Push LOCK OUT again for normal window operation When the orange band on the switch is showing the passengers can operate their windows Full Floating Horn The full floating horn is designed so that you may press anywhere on the steering wheel pad to sound the horn 2 45 Tilt Wheel A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive You can also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle To tilt the wheel hold the ste
15. Adjust your driving accordingly To limit wheel spin especially in slippery road conditions you should always leave the Enhanced Traction System on But you can turn the system off if you ever need to You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand mud ice or snow See Rocking Your Vehicle in the Index yellow blue To turn the system on or off press the TRAC button on the far right end of the Driver Information Center or the optional trip computer When you turn the system off the Enhanced Traction System warning light will come on and stay on If the Enhanced Traction System is limiting wheel spin when you press the button to turn the system off the warning light will come on and the system will turn off right away You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing the button again The Enhanced Traction System warning light should go off Braking in Emergencies With anti lock you can steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help you more than even the very best braking 4 11 Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning you can steer but it will take much more effort Variable Effort Steering Option This steering system provides lighter steering effort for parking and when driving at speeds below 20 mph 32 km h Steering effort will increase at higher speeds for impro
16. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can For vehicles equipped with the console shift lever see Shift Lock Release in the Index Shift Lock Release This vehicle is equipped with an electric Shift Lock Release system The shift lock release is designed to Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in PARK P with the shift knob button fully released if console shift and prevent movement of the shift lever out of PARK P unless the ignition is in a position other than OFF or LOCK The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of a dead or low voltage less than 9 V battery If your vehicle has a dead battery or a battery with low voltage there are two override access slots that will allow you to override the shift lock release The first is located underneath the steering column below the lock cylinder yellow blue To use this slot 1 Verify that the shift lever is in PARK P with the shift knob button released if console shift Locate the override access slot below the lock cylinder 3 Remove the override access slot cap gt 9 x DY Insert a key or screwdriver into the access slot press in and hold Rotate the ignition key to OFF Remove the key or screwdriver from the slot Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch Replace the override access slot cap 2 41 yellow blue To use this slot 1 Verify that the shift
17. Inspection and Rotation 000 6 45 Loading ott ducere terere e E TB 4 32 Loading Information Label 4 32 Pressure mecenes ria tup e me SES ane SA i 6 44 Temperature Jesse herr Bers me ge cm ees 6 48 Mc M Tm 6 48 Tread Weal soe eere be ERELTA IAS RES 6 48 Uniform Quality Grading 00 6 47 Wear Indicators 0 eee eee 6 46 Wheel Replacement 000 000 2000 6 49 yellow blue When It s Time for New 0 esses 6 46 TopStrap ee n Re seas cee eee he ee 1 43 jon P 2 39 MOCK uci iine edo bedeuten cesis 2 39 Wheel Nut veces eX Eee UR HERE OI 5 30 TOWNE ioco Spenge deh tine asta ose ben Bine cage 4 31 Recreational Vehicle 00 00 0000 00005 4 31 Trail t sss adhe seed os ede pO TERR EEEF EET 4 34 Your Vehicle 5 8 Trac Off Light 00 04 2 74 2 87 2 91 Trac Switch scias e E RR Gc EEEIEE 2 87 2 91 Traction Control System sce maerens 4 9 Control System Warning Light 2 73 4 9 Enhanced System Warning Light 2 74 4 10 LOW Light emere cu enr an tioned aces 2 74 4 10 Trailer Backing Up peser tre eei Ade 4 38 Brakes MM PL 4 37 Driving on Grades 0 0 00 cee eee eee 4 39 Driving with oe eese dha ee aoa eR E YS 4 37 Engine Cooling When Towing 4 40 Following Distance lesse ees 4 38 Hitches 3 45 iets eas EY A Rare a a E dg 4 37 Maintena
18. Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds Never tow with damaged parts not fully secured Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by the tow truck Always secure the vehicle on each side with separate safety chains when towing it Use only the correct hooks A Heavy Metal Engine Part B Good Battery C Dead Battery NOTICE Use the proper towing equipment to avoid damage to the bumper fascia or fog lamp areas of the vehicle With current trends in automotive styles and design it is essential that the correct towing equipment is used to tow a vehicle Your vehicle can be towed with wheel lift or car carrier equipment Don t have your vehicle towed on the drive wheels unless you must If the vehicle must be towed on the drive wheels do not tow the vehicle more than 500 cumulative miles 800 km or exceed 50 mph 80 km h If these limitations must be exceeded then the drive wheels have to be supported on a dolly Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your vehicle towed See Roadside Assistance in the Index Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage and a warning light about a hot engine on your instrument panel See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage and Engine Coolant Temperature Light in the Index You also have a low coolant light on your instrument panel See Low Coolant Light in the Index yellow blue Overheated Engi
19. See Tires in the Index for further details Cassette Deck Service Clean cassette deck Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play See Audio Systems in the Index for further details At Least Twice a Year Restraint System Check Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance Wiper Blade Check Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield Also see Wiper Blades Cleaning in the Index Weatherstrip Lubrication Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather more frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index yellow blue Automatic Transaxle Check Check the transaxle fluid level add if needed See Automatic Transaxle Fluid in the Index A fluid loss may indicate a problem Check the system and repair if nee
20. Shift into a gear and Release the parking brake 2 Letup on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks 4 40 yellow blue Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you re pulling a trailer See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid don t overfill engine oil drive belts cooling system and brake system Each of these is covered in this manual and the Index will help you find them quickly If you re trailering it s a good idea to review this information before you start your trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions See Engine Overheating in the Index yellow blue Y Section 5 Problems on the Road Here you ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road 5 2 Hazard Warning Flashers 5 12 Cooling System 5 2 Other Warning Devices 5 21 If A Tire Goes Flat 5 3 Jump Starting 5 22 Changing a Flat Tire 5 8 Towing Your Vehicle 5 32 Compact Spare Tire 5 9 Engine Overheating 5 33 If You re Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow 5 1 Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others They also let police know you
21. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold But do it as little as possible Preserve the fuel as long as you can To help keep warm you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes Recreational Vehicle Towing You can tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for use at your destination Be sure to use the proper towing equipment designed for recreational towing Follow the instructions for the towing equipment yellow blue Put the front wheels on a dolly Put the vehicle in PARK P Set the parking brake and then remove the key Clamp the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing Release the parking brake 4 31 Loading Your Vehicle GM TIRE LOADING INFORMATION OCCUPANTS VEHICLE CAP FAT CTR RR TOTAL K L 190 LOADING GVWR SAME AS ILC D TIRE PRESSUR m OT ADD 28KPA 4LBS T s Manual for tire pressure needed at 160 Km H 100 mph or higher speeds where legal and for additional tire information Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry The Tire Loading Information label is on the inside of the trunk lid The label tells you the proper size speed rating and recommended inflation pressures for the tires on your vehicle It als
22. System Warning Light in the Index LOW TRAC You may feel or hear the system working but this is normal If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin the cruise control will automatically disengage When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may reengage the cruise control See Cruise Control in the Index This light should come on briefly when you start the engine If it stays on or comes on while you are driving there s a problem with your traction control system TCS OFF See Traction Control System Warning Light in the Index When this warning light is on the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly The traction control system automatically comes on whenever you start your vehicle To limit wheel spin especially in slippery road conditions you should always leave the system on But you can turn the traction control system off if you ever need to You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand mud ice or snow See Rocking Your Vehicle in the Index To turn the system off press the TCS button on the far right end of the trip computer The traction control system warning light will come on and stay on If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press the button the warning light will come on and the system will turn off instantly 4 10 yellow blue You can turn the s
23. When a door is locked the inside handle won t open it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle This may not be so obvious You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren t locked Wear safety belts properly lock your doors and you will be far better off whenever you drive your vehicle There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle yellow blue To unlock either front door from outside the vehicle with your key insert it fully into the door key cylinder and turn it counterclockwise You can lock either front door from outside the vehicle with your key by inserting it fully into the door key cylinder and turning it clockwise To unlock either front or rear door from inside the vehicle push the lock lever back To lock either front or rear door from inside the vehicle push the lock lever forward Power Door Locks yellow blue To unlock all doors from inside the vehicle press the front of the power door lock switch on either front door If your vehicle is equipped with a Content Theft Deterrent system the power door lock switch will not unlock the doors until the system is disarmed See Content Theft Deterrent in the Index for more details You can lock all doors from inside the vehicle by pressing the rear of the power lock switch on either front door If your vehicle is equipped with a Content Theft Det
24. You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally 4 20 yellow blue Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you re going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road Hydroplaning doesn t happen often But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road If you can see reflections from trees telephone poles or other vehicles and raindrops dimple the water s surface there could be hydroplaning Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds There just isn t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when it is raining Driving Through Deep Standing Water NOTICE If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water water can come in through your engine s air intake and badly damage your engine Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle If you can t avoid deep puddles or standing water drive through them very slowly Some Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down allow some extra following distance And be especially careful when you pass
25. another vehicle Allow yourself more clear room ahead and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray e Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires in the Index yellow blue City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them You ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals 4 21 yellow blue Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving Freeway Driving Know the best way to get to where you are going Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross country trip Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities You ll save time and energy See the next part Freeway Driving Treat a green light as a warning signal A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it When a light turns green and just before you start to move check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light Mile for mile freeways also called thruways parkways expressways turnpikes or superhighways are the safest of all roads But they have their own special rules 4 22 The most important advice on freeway driving is Keep up with traffic and keep to the right Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving Too fast or too slow driving breaks a s
26. as you would be if you were leaning forward it could seriously injure you This is true even with Next Generation frontal air bags Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with Next Generation air bags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle yellow blue Children who are up against or very close to any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed This is true even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see the part of this manual called Children and see the caution labels on the sunvisors and the right front passenger s safety belt 1 23 There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows SRS SRS AIR BAG AIR BAG The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Air Bag Readiness Light in the Index for more information 1 24 yellow blue How the Air Bag System Works Where are the air bags The driver s air bag
27. turn the key to the RUN should work only in PARK P or NEUTRAL N position but don t start the engine Without applying If the starter works in any other position your the regular brake try to move the shift lever out of vehicle needs service PARK P with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of PARK P your vehicle s BTSI needs service 7 16 Ignition Transaxle Lock Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK P The key should come out only in LOCK Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK P Mechanism Check When you are doing this check your vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move yellow blue Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL N slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only To check the PARK P mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to PARK P Then re
28. warranty repairs your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you obtained at actual cost up to a maximum of 30 00 per day supported by receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair Generally it is not possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information Courtesy Transportation is available during the Bumper to Bumper warranty coverage period but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealerships and all program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer yellow blue Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel Canadian Vehicles For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
29. 2 57 Convex Outside 0 ccc eee eee 2 58 Electrochromic Day Night Rearview 2 57 Inside Day Night Rearview lesus 2 57 Power Remote Control 00 000 e eee 2 58 Visor Vanity seer reeni at eben yea daha athe ot 2 63 MMT i seite nucis erede es he ee gard aca ded etas 6 4 Mountain Roads 0 cece eee eee eee 4 25 Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting Choices 2 12 Arming and Disarming the Content Theft Deterrent 2 20 Automatic Door Locks 00 00 eee eee 2 14 Content Theft Deterrent 005 2 19 Delayed Illumination Exit Lighting 2 13 Entering Programming Mode 2 13 Exiting Programming Mode 2 13 Last Door Closed and Lockout Prevention 2 15 Remote Driver s Unlock Control 2 16 Remote Lock Unlock Confirmation 2 17 Ne CONVENIENCE s osecnr etr ERIS BR OPE Ades 2 62 Neutral Automatic Transaxle 0 0 2 33 New Vehicle Break In 000 0 eeeeee 2 26 Night Vision cis ctde che cede ane ca hada oo Rs we 4 17 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 68 Nuisance Alarms 00 0 c cece e eee eee 2 25 Odometer sued bgscer ee bad pude QOO Haw as 2 69 Odometer Trip cerere eee RE LER ERREUR 2 69 Off Road Recovery esses eee eee ee 4 14 Oil Engine ueiguese Sachi EERE OER A RIS EQUES 6 13 Life Message 51e eei he
30. 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Description Alt Sense Torque Converter Clutch TCC Fuel Pump Electronic Control Module Powertrain Control Module Spare Fog Lamps Horn Chime Mall Module Taillamps Parking Lamps Sidemarker Lamps Dimmable Lamps Spare Fuse Fog Lamps Spare Air Conditioning Clutch Diode Relay 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 yellow blue Description Cooling Fan Cooling Fan 2 Ignition Main Cooling Fan 1 Air Conditioning Clutch Fuel Pump Fuel Pump Speed Cont Horn Fog Lamp 6 65 Replacement Bulbs Exterior Lamps Bulb Number Back Up cease Rr preceded 3156 Center High Mounted Stop 1141 Front Parking Turn Signal 3357 NAK Headlamps High Low Beam 9007 Stop Tail Turn Signal leues 3057 Front Sidemarker 0 000 194 RearSidemarker seuueus 194 Capacities and Specifications Please refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index for more information Automatic Transaxle with Overdrive Pan Removal and Replacement 8 0 quarts 7 5 L After Complete Overhaul 10 0 quarts 9 5 L When draining replacing converter or auxiliary cooler more fluid may be needed 6 66 yellow blue Cooling System Including Reservoir 3100 Code M 11 0 quarts 10 42 L 3800 Code K 12 3 quarts 11 7 L 3800 Supercharged Cod
31. 85 Four Way Lumbar Driver s Seat 1 4 Option FUSES ires acere a e nee deque 6 60 Remote Control Mirror 0 0 000008 2 58 Retained Accessory 0 0 eee eee eens 2 27 SIX Way Sedb e tod eenaa eA eae aaa 1 3 Steering cde icc aches ENET FE ENG beue pe eee 4 12 Steering Fluid iis kes iio cee oie he ver 6 29 bann EE 2 45 Power Steering Fluid Howto Check iis ces emen Rhen mx 6 30 What to USE sedeat I red eae E OX ERR 6 30 When to Check si isse nem rmn 6 29 Pregnancy Use of Safety Belts 1 21 Problems on the Road 0 0 0 0 0002 e ee 5 1 Publications Service and Owner 0005 8 14 Radiator Leia GU ERG RR RU PRIV aa dS ERE ES 5 16 Radiator Pressure Cap 0 00 00 eee eee eee 6 25 Radio Reception as rendren n a c ee eee eee eee 3 26 Radios MM 3 10 3 14 3 16 Rain Driving In inus ediren srities M rry UE 4 18 Range Message uox edee e tpe Rame edere 2 90 Reading Lamps 0 0 e eee cece eee 2 56 Rear Door Security Locks 0 0 000 00000 2 7 Outside Seat Position 00 0008 1 30 Safety Belt Comfort Guides 0 1 33 Seat Passengers eee 1 30 Window Defogger eeseeeee eee 3 8 Rear Armrest Storage lleleeeeeeeees 2 61 Rearview Mirror Electrochromic Day Night 00 2 57 Inside Day Night 0 00 0 0c eee eee 2 57 Reclining Front Seatbacks
32. Carefully scrape off excess stain then sponge the soiled area with cool water If a stain remains follow the multi purpose interior cleaner instructions described earlier If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine treat the area with a water baking soda solution 1 teaspoon 5 ml of baking soda to 1 cup 250 ml of lukewarm water Let dry Stains caused by candy ice cream mayonnaise chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows 1 2 Carefully scrape off excess stain First clean with cool water and allow to dry completely If a stain remains follow instructions for Multi Purpose Interior Cleaner Cleaning Vinyl Use warm water and a clean cloth Rub with a clean damp cloth to remove dirt You may have to do it more than once Things like tar asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don t get them off quickly Use a clean cloth and a vinyl leather cleaner See your dealer for this product Cleaning Leather Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth Then let the leather dry naturally Do not use heat to dry For stubborn stains use a leather cleaner See your dealer for this product Never use oils varnishes solvent based or abrasive cleaners furniture polish or shoe polish on leather Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately If dirt is allowed to work into the finish it can harm t
33. Cleaner and Capture Non Solvent Dry Spot and Soil Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet They will clean normal spots and stains very well You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Here are some cleaning tips Always read the instructions on the cleaner label Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set Carefully scrape off any excess stain 6 51 Useaclean cloth or sponge and change to a clean area often A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn Ifaring forms on fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately or it will set Using Multi Purpose Interior Cleaner on Fabric 1 Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt 2 Always clean a whole trim panel or section Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines 3 Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on the container label to form thick suds 4 Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge Don t saturate the material and don t rub it roughly 5 As soon as you ve cleaned the section use a sponge to remove the suds 6 Wipe cleaned area with a clean damp towel or cloth 7 Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry 6 52 yellow blue Special Fabric Cleaning Problems Stains caused by such things as catsup coffee black egg fruit fruit juice milk soft drinks vomit urine and blood can be removed as follows 1 4
34. Convenience Net If Equipped The vehicle may have a convenience net You ll see it on the back wall of the trunk Put small loads like grocery bags in the net It can help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or quick starts and stops The net isn t for larger heavier loads Store them in the trunk as far forward as you can You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when you re not using it 2 62 yellow blue Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter The center front ashtray is on the instrument panel To open it pull at the bottom of the ashtray until it is fully open To remove the ashtray cup lift the tabs on the sides and pull out The vehicle has one rear ashtray There is either one on the front seat armrest back or one on the back of the center console if you have that option To open the ashtray press the right side and turn it open To remove the ashtray for cleaning press the snuffer as you lift up the bottom of the ashtray NOTICE Don t put papers and other things that burn into the ashtrays If you do cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire causing damage To use the lighter located inside the center front ashtray just push it in all the way and let go When it s ready it will pop back by itself NOTICE Don t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating If you do it won t be able to back away from the heating element when it s ready
35. D for higher speeds THIRD 3 This position is also used for normal driving but it offers more power and lower fuel economy than DRIVE D 2 34 yellow blue Here are some times you might choose THIRD 3 instead of DRIVE D When driving on hilly winding roads When towing a trailer so there is less shifting between gears When going down a steep hill SECOND 2 This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy than THIRD 3 You can use SECOND 2 on hills It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads but then you would also want to use the brakes off and on NOTICE Don t drive in SECOND 2 for more than 25 miles 40 km at speeds over 55 mph 88 km h or you can damage the transaxle Use DRIVE D or THIRD 3 as much as possible Don t shift into SECOND 2 unless you are going slower than 65 mph 105 km h or you can damage the engine FIRST 1 This position gives you even more power but lower fuel economy than SECOND 2 You can use it on very steep hills or in deep snow or mud If the shift lever is put in FIRST 1 the transaxle won t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough NOTICE If the front wheels can t rotate don t try to drive This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object You could damage the transaxle Also if you stop when going uphill don t hold th
36. Front 0000 1 5 9 9 Seats Heated racic ted ets haces EE RI ERE CEA 1 4 Manual Front 0 eee eee eee eee 1 2 Manual Lumbar 00 0 e ee eee eee ee 1 3 Power Four Way Lumbar Driver s 1 4 Restraint Systems 0 0 00 cece eee ee eee 1 1 Seat Controls ices pee he t RE eee erate 1 2 Securing a Child Restraint 0 1 44 Six Way Power sersa rane 0 0 cee eee eee ees 1 3 Second Gear Automatic Transaxle 2 34 SEVICE oe oae Suh anes Gra deat a ean heer enh TOM OT EEE 6 2 Bulletins Ordering 00 0 000000 8 14 Manuals Ordering 000 0000 ae 8 14 Parts Identification Label 0 000 6 59 Publications Ordering 0 005 8 14 Work Doing Your Own 0 0 0 0 000 00 6 2 Service and Appearance Care 000 0 6 1 Service and Owner Publications 8 13 Service Engine Soon Light 00 0 2 75 Service Publications llle esee ee eee 8 14 Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle 1 28 Sheet Metal Damage 00 0000 6 57 Shift Lock Release lssleeeeeesees ee eee 2 40 Sluf ng 2245s bheebexwpe eects REIR IRIS wate 2 32 Automatic Transaxle 0 00 eee ee eee 2 32 COMTI serrera haces Og ena oes ncm en Pa estem 2 37 Console i bust ve E p an ter eon seio Care 2 38 Into PARK P soii ceret
37. Remote Trunk Release Press the trunk symbol on your remote keyless entry transmitter to open your trunk The transaxle must be in PARK P for this feature to operate Matching Transmitter s To Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased through your dealer Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle any remaining transmitters must also be matched Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle Each vehicle can have only four transmitters matched to it 2 10 yellow blue Battery Replacement Under normal use the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about two years You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won t work at the normal range in any location If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works it s probably time to change the battery NOTICE When replacing the battery use care not to touch any of the circuitry Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter To replace the battery 1 Insert a flat object like a dime into the slot on the side of the transmitter and twist to separate the halves 2 Gently pry t
38. S A For More Information See Owner s Manual Some fuses are in a fuse block located inside of the glove box behind a small bin on the right side To open Circuit Description pull the cover out The fuse block is inside On the back edge of this cover is a fuse puller and a fuse usage chart To use the fuse puller place the wide end of the fuse HEADLAMP Headlamps puller over the plastic end of the fuse Squeeze the ends SEAT Power Seat Power Lumbar over the fuse and pull it out PWR WDO Power Windows Breaker To reinstall the bin position the lower end and turn the top into position Press on the sides until it snaps into place 6 61 Fuse MALL PGM MALL WIPER STR WHL ILLUM STR WHL CTRL SUNROOF RADIO RADIO AMP PWR LOCK HSEAT LUM R DEFOG RAP HAZARD PWR MIR HVAC HI 6 62 Description Mall Module Program Mall Module Wipers Steering Wheel Illumination Steering Wheel Control Sunroof Radio Antenna Bose Amplifier Mall Module Power Locks Heated Seats Power Lumbar Rear Defog Retained Accessory Power Hazard Flashers Power Mirrors HVAC Blower Hi Fuse CIG LTR INT LAMP STOP LAMP AUX CNSL CD CHG ECM CRUISE I P IGN SIR TURN BTSI HVAC CTRL yellow blue Description Cigarette Lighter ALDL Floor Console Auxiliary Outlet Mall Module Interior lamps Stoplamp Auxiliary Power Overhead Console CD Changer Electronic Control Module Cruise Control Ch
39. Sed necem P bra 2 90 SUpercharger i uxcsedo esse cos 4G wiser alee de odes eee 6 21 Warning Light i ee RII Ree EE YES 2 78 OnStar SYSTEM D 2 64 Overhead Console sesleeeeeeeeees 2 59 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode 5 9 Overheating Engine sss esses 5 9 Owner Checks and Services 0 200005 7 14 Owner Publications Ordering 8 14 Paint Spotting Chemical lees esee 6 57 Park Automatic Transaxle 0 0 0 0 0 eae 2 32 Shifting Into i i eek teret n EE RE 2 37 Shifting Out of sce eka sn Cae pede DPI 2 40 Parking At Night een bhee c eRAERERMEESERC ERU RES 2 23 Brake 2 2 M pert Im LEY re RUE 2 36 Brake Mechanism Check suus 7 17 Lots 3 Scr sona tame dicet e matin vepres beth qaae ete BARRES 2 23 Over Things That Burn 0 2 43 With a Trailer eus ee eec ep eD XR 4 39 Passenger Position 0 00 e cee eee eee eee 1 22 P ssilg ous cca uae e US PINO Sa Ge Ee pex 4 14 Passing Trailery sonce yri sA edna eens PEERS 4 38 Performance Shift Light 0000 2 90 Performance Shifting 0000 00 00 eee 2 35 Periodic Maintenance Inspections 7 18 9 8 yellow blue Pontiac Cares Information 0 004 8 2 Power Accessory Outlet 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 2 64 Door LOGS auae eee eae ene eed 2 5 Drop Peat re sess e reme eem 2
40. Supercharged Engine Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when you re through 6 15 What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by looking for the Starburst symbol This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API Do not use any oil which does not carry this Starburst symbol If you change your own oil be sure you use oil that has the Starburst symbol on the front of the oil container If you have your oil changed for you be sure the oil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle as shown in the following chart 6 16 yellow blue RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING SELECT THE LOWEST SAE VISCOSITY GRADE DIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE LOOK FOR HOT THIS SYMBOL WEATHER m E F SAE 5W 30 PREFERRED aera IF NEITHER SAE 5W 30 NOR SAE 10W 30 COLD GRADE OILS ARE AVAILABLE SAE 30 2 GRADE MAY BE USED AT TEMPERATUR WEATHER ABOVE 40 DEGREES F 4 DEGREES C DO NOT USE SAE 10W 40 SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED 3100 Engine As shown in the chart if you have the 3100 V6 engine SAE 5W 30 is best for your vehicle However you can us
41. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume RECALL Press this button briefly to recall the station being played or to display the clock If you press the knob when the ignition is off the clock will show for a few seconds Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display shows your selection TUNE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to choose radio stations Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it SEEK Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there PUSHBUTTONS The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 Just 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select the band 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until SET appears on the display Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton Setting the Tone EQUALIZER A seven band equalizer is part of your audio system Slide the levers up to boost or down to reduce frequency range yellow blue Adjusting the Speakers BAL Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to move the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to move the sound to th
42. Turn on your hazard flashers 4 29 Tieared cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you ve been stopped by the snow Puton extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you If you have no blankets or extra clothing make body insulators from newspapers burlap bags rags floor mats anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm You can run the engine to keep warm but be careful 4 30 yellow blue Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You can t see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn t collect there Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that s away from the wind This will help keep CO out Run your engine only as long as you must This saves fuel When you run the engine make it go a little faster than just idle That is push the accelerator slightly This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps Let the heater run for a while Then shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat
43. a problem Have the system inspected and repaired 6 29 yellow blue How to Check Power Steering Fluid When the engine compartment is cool wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag Replace the cap and completely tighten it Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The level should be at the C or COLD mark If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark 3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine When the engine compartment is hot the level should be at the H or HOT mark When it s cold the level should be at the C or COLD mark If the fluid is at the ADD mark you should add fluid What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Always use the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals 3100 Engine 6 30 yellow blue Windshield Washer Fluid Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY Add washer fluid until the tank is full What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid be sure to read NOTICE the manufacturer s instructions before use If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water Add
44. air and directs it two ways Half of the air is directed through the instrument panel outlets Most of the remaining air is directed through the floor ducts and a little to the defrost and side window vents e Vad LOWER This setting sends most of the air through the ducts near the floor The remaining airflow comes out of the defroster and side window vents We od DEFOG This setting allows half of the air to go to the floor ducts and half to the defroster and side window vents YY DEF This setting directs most of the air through the defrost vent Some of the air goes to the floor ducts and the side window vents The air conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting unless the outside temperature is below 38 F 3 3 C yellow blue Air Conditioning On very hot days open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape This reduces the time for the vehicle to cool down For quick cool down on very hot days use RECIRC If this setting is used for long periods of time the air in your vehicle may become too dry For normal cooling on hot days use UPPER with the A C button pushed in The system will bring in outside air and cool it On cool but sunny days the sun may warm your upper body but your lower body may not be warm enough You can use BI LEV with the A C button pushed in The system will bring in outside air and direct it to your upper body while sending slightly warmed air to your lower b
45. aren t even aware of it 4 18 yellow blue Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads HI My Hp 7 JR o JT WIL HT ly AY M M Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble On a wet road you can t stop accelerate or turn as well because your tire to road traction isn t as good as on dry roads And if your tires don t have much tread left you ll get even less traction It s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement The heavier the rain the harder it is to see Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals pavement markings the edge of the road and even people walking It s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts yellow blue Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems too The water may affect your brakes Try to avoid puddles But if you can t try to slow down before you hit them 4 19 Wet brakes can cause accidents They won t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side
46. as possible with the ends securely fastened Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer s instructions If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle stop and retighten them If the contact continues slow down until it stops Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle Appearance Care Remember cleaning products can be hazardous Some are toxic Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle be sure to follow the manufacturer s warnings and instructions And always open your doors or windows when you re cleaning the inside Never use these to clean your vehicle Gasoline Benzene Naphtha Carbon Tetrachloride Acetone Paint Thinner Turpentine Lacquer Thinner Nail Polish Remover They can all be hazardous some more than others and they can all damage your vehicle too yellow blue Don t use any of these unless this manual says you can In many uses these will damage your vehicle Alcohol Laundry Soap Bleach Reducing Agents Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt Wipe vinyl leather plastic and painted surfaces with a clean damp cloth Cleaning of Fabric Carpet Your dealer has two cleaners Multi Purpose Interior
47. automatically in this setting unless the outside temperature is below 38 F 3 3 C Air Conditioning Compressor Button Press the A C button to operate the air conditioning compressor The indicator light above the button will glow when the button is pressed You don t have to press the button to run the compressor in MAX or DEFROST because it will already be running in these modes yellow blue Air Conditioning On very hot days open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape This reduces the time for the vehicle to cool down For quick cool down on very hot days use MAX with the temperature knob all the way in the blue area If this setting is used for long periods of time the air in your vehicle may become too dry For normal cooling on hot days use UPPER with the temperature knob in the blue area and the A C button pushed in The system will bring in outside air and cool it On cool but sunny days the sun may warm your upper body but your lower body may not be warm enough You can use BI LEVEL with the temperature knob in the middle and the A C button pushed in The system will bring in outside air and direct it to your upper body while sending slightly warmed air to your lower body You may notice this temperature difference more at some times than others Heating On cold days use FLOOR with the temperature knob all the way in the red area The system will bring in outside air heat it and send it to
48. been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire Loading Information label Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque in the Index Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index 6 45 When It s Time for New Tires One way to tell when it s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which will appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric 6 46 yellow blue The tire has a bump bulge or split The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that can t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage Buying New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires you need look a
49. belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body 1 17 yellow blue Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you The belt is buckled in the wrong place 1 18 yellow blue Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which aren t as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen A The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times 1 19 Q What s wrong with this A ATO JD nit y y a A The belt is twisted across the body 1 20 yellow blue You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you wouldn t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer to
50. brakes Adjust your driving accordingly The anti lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem yellow blue Traction Control System Warning Light 3800 Supercharged V6 Engine Only TCS OFF The traction control system warning light may come on for the following reasons If you turn the system off by pressing the TCS button located on the far right hand side of the Driver Information Center the warning light will come on and stay on To turn the system back on press the button again The warning light should go off See Traction Control System in the Index for more information Ifthere s a brake system problem that is specifically related to traction control the traction control system will turn off and the warning light will come on If your brakes begin to overheat the traction control system will turn off and the warning light will come on until your brakes cool down If the traction control system warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on your vehicle needs service 2 73 Enhanced Traction System Warning Light 3100 V6 or 3800 V6 Engine TRAC OFF The Enhanced Traction System warning light may come on for the following reasons If you turn the system off by pressing the TRAC button on the far
51. eI RE ex RE ES 2 37 Out of PARK P 2 0 cece eee eee 2 40 Performance cs le eee Rr e ewe ewan 2 35 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 00 1 16 Signaling Turns 2 2 0 cee eese 2 47 Skidding 23er sae pape deicep Ra rs 4 16 Sound Equipment Adding 00 3 26 9 10 yellow blue Spare Tire Compact 5 32 Specifications and Capacities 0000 6 66 Specifications Engine 00 200 6 67 Speech Impaired Customer Assistance 8 5 Speedometer ses ser Rer kem ep 2 69 SRS eraa e aaa a et ov sak tease d Ld 1 22 Stains Cleaning sese RE Rem Re 6 51 Starter Switch Check asssesseerrrreeere ese 7 16 Starting Your Engine 0 0000 00005 2 28 Mirum PL sm 5 10 Steering 2o Flees wasted ohare es ea Y C Poe SRE ETE 4 12 Audio Wheel Controls 0 002008 3 25 In Emergencies esee xae ehm 4 13 PONE gieren nete a ent eue dene ceps 4 12 Tipsi iode E Males e keke GE E RE Re VA 4 12 Wheel Tilt 1 eno ied brem nen 2 46 Storage Compartments 00000000000 2 59 Center Console si esee ee theme er 2 61 Garage Door Opener ssesseseesess 2 59 Overhead Console essleesseessses 2 59 Rear Armrest iscas er cee edhe cose nwa ds 2 61 Sunglasses coda beta me CERES y Y een 2 59 Storage Vehicle 0 0 eee eee eee eee ee 6 35 Storing Flat Tire and Tools 0 0 0 0 eee eee eae 5 30 Spare
52. engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer don t drive over 50 mph 80 km h and don t make starts at full throttle This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer Don t drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers or no more than 55 mph 90 km h to save wear on your vehicle s parts yellow blue Three important considerations have to do with weight the weight of the trailer the weight of the trailer tongue and the total weight on your vehicle s tires Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It should never weigh more than 1 000 Ibs But even that can be too heavy It depends on how you plan to use your rig For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important And it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice or you can write us at Pontiac GMC Customer Assistance Center P O Box 436008 Pontiac MI 48343 6008 In Canada write to General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 4 35 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to mea
53. fix it blue Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don t wear safety belts To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle The belt should go back out of the way Before you close the door be sure the belt is out of the way If you slam the door on it you can damage both the belt and your vehicle A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy 1 21 The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it s more likely that the fetus won t be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Right Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger s safety belt properly see Driver Position earlier in this section The right front passenger s safety belt works the same way as the driver s safety belt except for one thing If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way you will engage the child restraint locking feature If this happens just let the belt go back all the way and start again Supplemental Restraint System SRS This part explains the Supplemental Restraint System SRS or air bag system Your vehicle has
54. in good working condition But we don t know exactly how you ll drive it You may drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You may use your vehicle in making deliveries Or you may drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You may need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition see your dealer yellow blue This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them If you go to your dealer for your service needs you ll know that GM trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle This schedule is for vehicles that carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits You will find these limits on your vehicle s Tire Loading Information label See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits use the recommended fuel See Fuel in the Index Scheduled Maintenanc
55. is harder to push Or the pedal may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle in the Index 2 72 yellow blue Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident If the light is still on after you ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully have the vehicle towed for service When the ignition is on the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn t release fully If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released it means you have a brake problem Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light With the anti lock brake system this light will come on when you start your engine and it will stay on for three seconds That s normal If the anti lock brake system warning light stays on longer than normal after you ve started your engine turn the ignition off Or if the light comes on and stays on when you re driving stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off Then start the engine again to reset the system If the light still stays on or comes on again while you re driving your vehicle needs service If the light is on and the regular brake system warning light isn t on you still have brakes but you don t have anti lock
56. is very close to the child s face or neck A Move the child toward the center of the vehicle but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child s shoulder so that in a crash the child s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides in the Index If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child s face or neck you might want to place the child in the center seat position the one that has only a lap belt 1 51 1 52 yellow blue Never do this Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt but the shoulder part is behind the child If the child wears the belt in this way in a crash the child might slide under the belt The belt s force would then be applied right on the child s abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries Wherever the child sits the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the child s thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt isn t long enough to fasten your dealer will order you an extender It s free When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you The extender will be just for you a
57. is in the middle of the steering wheel yellow blue If something is between an occupant and an air bag the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear Don t put anything between an occupant and an air bag and don t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering The right front passenger s air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side 1 25 When should an air bag inflate An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash The air bag will inflate only if the impact speed is above the system s designed threshold level If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn t move or deform the threshold level is about 12 to 18 mph 19 to 29 km h The threshold level can vary however with specific vehicle design so that it can be somewhat above or below this range If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform such as a parked car the threshold level will be higher The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers side impacts or rear impacts because inflation would not help the occupant In any particular crash no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the v
58. is recommended Thermostat Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat in the engine coolant system The thermostat stops the flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant reaches a preset temperature When you replace your thermostat an ACDelco thermostat is recommended 6 25 Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first if you add only DEX COOL extended life coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low If you have a problem with engine overheating or if you need to add coolant to your radiator see Engine Overheating in the Index A 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant will Give freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C Give boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C Protect against rust and corrosion Help keep the proper engine temperature Letthe warning lights and gages work as they should 6 26 yellow blue NOTICE When adding coolant it is important that you use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months
59. like suitcases tools packages or anything else they will go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they ll keep going yellow blue Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Put things in the trunk of your vehicle In a trunk put them as far forward as you can Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Don t leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can 4 33 Towing a Trailer If you don t use the correct equipment and drive properly you can lose control when you pull a trailer For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all You and your passengers could be seriously injured You may also damage your vehicle the resulting repairs would not be covered by your warranty Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle Do not tow a trailer if your vehicle is equipped with the 3800 L67 supercharged engine 4 34 yellow blue Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the proper trailer towing equipment To identify what the vehicle trailering capaci
60. lines for the AM FM antenna There is enough space between the lines to attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering with radio reception 3 29 yellow blue f NOTES yellow blue Y Section 4 Your Driving and the Road Here you ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions We ve also included many other useful tips on driving 4 2 Defensive Driving 4 21 City Driving 4 3 Drunken Driving 4 22 Freeway Driving 4 5 Control of a Vehicle 4 23 Before Leaving on a Long Trip 4 6 Braking 4 24 Highway Hypnosis 4 12 Steering 4 25 Hill and Mountain Roads 4 14 Off Road Recovery 4 27 Winter Driving 4 14 Passing 4 31 Recreational Vehicle Towing 4 16 Loss of Control 4 32 Loading Your Vehicle 4 17 Driving at Night 4 34 Towing a Trailer 4 18 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is Drive defensively Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle Buckle up See Safety Belts in the Index yellow blue Defensive driving really means be ready for anything On city streets rural roads or freeways it means always expect the unexpected Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do Be ready for their mistakes Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents Yet they are common Allow enough f
61. on collision So here are some tips for passing Drive ahead Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass wait for a better time Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection delay your pass A broken center line usually indicates it s all right to pass providing the road ahead is clear Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you re awaiting an opportunity For one thing following too closely reduces your area of vision especially if you re following a larger vehicle Also you won t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops Keep back a reasonable distance When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don t get too close Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane If the way is clear to pass you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity
62. or the ignition switch If none of this works then your vehicle needs service Retained Accessory Power RAP With Retained Accessory Power the power windows audio system and sunroof will continue to work up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF and none of the doors are opened 2 27 Starting Your Engine Move your shift lever to PARK P or NEUTRAL N Your engine won t start in any other position that s a safety feature To restart when you re already moving use NEUTRAL N only NOTICE Don t try to shift to PARK P if your vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transaxle Shift to PARK P only when your vehicle is stopped OTICE If you can not remove your ignition key from the ignition and gear shift is in PARK P with the shift knob button fully released if console shift See Shift Lock Release in the Index 2 28 yellow blue Starting Your 3100 V6 Engine 1 Without pushing the accelerator pedal turn your ignition key to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm NOTICE Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter 2 If your engine won t start or starts but then s
63. right hand side of the driver information center or trip computer if equipped the warning light will come on and stay on To turn the system back on press the button again The warning light should go off See Enhanced Traction System in the Index for more information If the Enhanced Traction System warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on your vehicle needs service Adjust your driving accordingly If the traction control system is affected by an engine related problem the system will turn off and the warning light will come on 2 74 yellow blue When this warning light is on the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly Low Traction Light If you have the Enhanced Traction System or the Traction Control System this light will also come on when the system is limiting wheel spin LOW TRAC You may feel or hear the system working but this is normal Slippery road conditions may exist if the low traction light comes on so adjust your driving accordingly The light will stay on for a few seconds after the anti lock system stops adjusting brake pressure or the Enhanced Traction System or the Traction Control System stops limiting wheel spin See Enhanced Traction System or Traction Control System in the Index The low traction light also comes on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on t
64. side of the cassette are playing The tape player automatically begins playing the other side when it reaches the end of the tape If E and a number appear on the radio display the tape won t play because of an error E10 The tape is tight and the player can t turn the tape hubs Remove the tape Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil Turn the tape over and repeat If the hubs do not turn easily your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player Try a new tape to make sure your player is working properly Ell The tape is broken Try a new tape E14 Wrapped tape Try a new tape 3 12 yellow blue If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected please contact your dealer If your radio displays an error number write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem PREV 1 Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to search for the previous selection on the tape Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for PREV or SEEK to work The tape direction arrow blinks during PREV or SEEK operation Press PREV or the SEEK down arrow to stop searching The sound will mute during PREV or SEEK operation NEXT 2 Press this button or the SEEK up arrow to search for the next selection on the tape If you hold the button the player will continue moving forward through the tape Your tap
65. sudden stop or a crash or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for small adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide pulls the belt away from the neck and head yellow There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts Here s how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of the seatback and the interior body to remove the guide from its storage clip yellowl 2 Slide the guide under and past the belt The elastic 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat cord must be under the belt Then place the guide The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into on top the slots of the guide 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described in Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions earl
66. sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you must file with the GM BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you are required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing any court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1804 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its partici
67. the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely 5 21 Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on your hazard warning flashers Changing a tire can cause an injury The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people You and they could be badly injured Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving 1 Set the parking brake firmly 2 Put the shift lever in PARK P 3 Turn off the engine To be even more certain the vehicle won t move you can put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle at the opposite end 5 22 yellow blue p P The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire yellow blue Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The equipment you ll need is in the trunk Pull the carpeting from the floor of the trunk Then lift and remove the cover Turn the center nut on the compact spare cover counterclockwise to remove it Remove the compact spare tire See Compact Spare Tire in the Index for more information about the compact spare 5 23 yellow blue Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise and The tools you ll be using include the jack A extension remove it Then remove the jack and w
68. washer or if the wiper blade chatters when running wax sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield Cleaner Bon Ami Powder non scratching glass cleaning powder GM Part No 1050011 The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent Then rinse the blade with water Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary replace blades that look worn Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months During very cold damp weather more frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty depth of color gloss retention and durability Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve your vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water Don t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun Use a car washing soap Don t use strong soaps or chemical detergents Be sure to rinse the vehicle well removing all soap residue completely You can get GM approved cle
69. weigh much until a crash During a crash a baby will become so heavy you can t hold it For example in a crash CAUTION Continued Child Restraints Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have protection provided by appropriate restraints Q What are the different types of add on child restraints A Add on child restraints are available in four basic types When selecting a child restraint take into consideration not only the child s weight and size but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used 1 38 yellow blue An infant car bed A is a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle It s an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface With an infant car bed make sure that the infant s head rests toward the center of the vehicle yellow blue A rear facing infant restraint B positions an infant to face the rear of the vehicle Rear facing infant restraints are designed for infants of up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg and about one year of age This type of restraint faces the rear so that the infant s head neck and body can have the support they need in a frontal crash Some infant seats come in two parts the base stays secured in the vehicle and the seat part is removable 1 39 1 40 yellow blue A forward facing child restraint C E positions a child u
70. you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of PARK P before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK P 2 39 Shifting Out of PARK P Before shifting out of PARK P you must fully apply your regular brakes Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index Your vehicle has a Brake Transaxle Shift Interlock BTST You must fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition is in RUN See Automatic Transaxle Operation in the Index If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing it all the way into PARK P while keeping the brake pedal pushed down Release the shift lever button if you have a console shift Then move the shift lever out of PARK P being sure to press the shift lever button if you have a console shift 2 40 yellow blue If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can t shift out of PARK P with column shift try this 1 Turn the ignition key to OFF 2 Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4 3 Shift to NEUTRAL N 4 Start the engine and shift to the drive gear you want 5
71. your vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible Cleaning Aluminum Wheels If Equipped Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied 6 56 yellow blue The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle Don t use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on any wheels other than chrome plated wheels Don t take your car through an automatic car wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels Cleaning Tires To clean your tires use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner NOTICE When applying a tire dressing always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle Petroleum based products may damage the paint finish and tire
72. 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals causing the sound to come and go Tips About Your Audio System Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it 3 26 yellow blue To help avoid hearing loss or damage Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly NOTICE Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle like a tape player CB radio mobile telephone or two way radio be sure you can add what you want If you can it s very important to do it properly Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle s engine Delco Electronics radio or other systems and even damage them Your vehicle s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly So before adding sound equipment check with your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units Care of Your Cassette Tape Player A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from con
73. 44 Specifications iere ee RRE we 6 67 Starting YOUE 22d br acc a re een EE 2 28 Supercharged sr aet tt actee een e 6 13 Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing 4 40 Engine Oll uides year e ea hub ak 6 13 Adding cR ERE PER P REDE NIE PER RE 6 15 Additives e perseae oN byes Vene Saban tes 6 19 Checking 422 uet act een WA ae Merete Beco 6 14 Used 2 cies over dudctad upset Pateat Osea eue dbane ced 6 19 What Kind to Use 0 2 eee ee ee eee 6 16 When to Change 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 6 19 Ethanol Ee 6 5 Exhaust Engine 2 00 2 22 2 43 4 30 ExtLightmng 3c cies e pee Ev RERO ERN 2 55 Express Open Sunroof 0 0000 esses 2 65 Exterior Lamps i erum ree Ag HR tee de 2 51 Fabric Cleaning iets ecient pene ea RR ee watt 6 51 Filling a Portable Fuel Container suse 6 8 Filling Your Tank 0 eee eee eee eee 6 6 Filter Ad 1 oes tend rity Ea e 4 esate ta Sea aes 6 20 Finish Cate ieeccih ec rER IRR RE eres Padre 6 55 Finish Damage senes ke Rer RESP AR 6 57 First Gear Automatic Transaxle 2 35 Flashers Hazard Warning ssesssss 5 2 Flash to Pass Feature 2 47 Flat If a Tire Goes 0 2 eee 5 21 Flat Tire Changing 00 0 0 eee eee 5 22 Fluid Capacities 1 0 0 eee eee eee eee 6 66 Fluids and Lubricants 0 00 00 00005 7 20 FO Lamps ox easiest poetae Sip eb Rupe AEE 2 53 Foreign Countries F
74. 45 km the display will flash the word LOW continuously and the vehicle will chime three times The range is calculated from the average econ value times the fuel remaining in the tank S LOW This light will come on when the ignition is on and the fluid container is low DOOR AJAR If one of the doors is left ajar a light will appear next to that door on the vehicle outline BOOST GAGE If you have the 3800 supercharged engine this gage will show the amount of boost the engine is receiving TRUNK AJAR If the trunk is not fully closed or open a light will outline the trunk area on the vehicle outline LOW TRAC This light will come on when the Traction Control System is limiting wheel spin See Traction Control System or Low Traction Light in the Index yellow blue TRAC TCS OFF This light lets you know that the Traction Control System has been disabled and will not limit wheel spin See Traction Control System Warning Light or Low Traction Light in the Index TRAC TCS SWITCH If the vehicle has the Traction Control System you will have a disable switch on the far right side of the Trip Computer The Traction Control System is automatically activated when you turn the ignition on This switch will activate deactivate the Traction Control System If you need to disable the system such as when you are stuck and are rocking the vehicle back and forth push this switch See Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow in th
75. 8 yellow blue Care of Your Compact Disc Player The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged If the mast should ever become slightly bent you can straighten it out by hand If the mast is badly bent as it might be by vandals you should replace it Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still tightened to the rear quarter panel Backglass Antenna If Equipped Your AM FM antenna is integrated with your rear window defogger located in the rear window Be sure that the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched and that the lines on the glass are not damaged If the inside surface is damaged it could interfere with radio reception NOTICE Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the rear window with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp This may damage the rear defogger grid and affect your radio s ability to pick up stations clearly The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty yellow blue Because this antenna is built into your rear window there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes and vandals If you choose to add a cellular telephone to your vehicle and the antenna needs to be attached to the glass be sure that you do not damage the grid
76. 8 13 yellow blue 1999 PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check money order or credit card information to Helm Incorporated address below CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1999 PONTIAC SERVICE MANUALS Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc RETAIL SELL PRICE 90 00 TRANSMISSION TRANSAXLE TRANSFER CASE UNIT REPAIR MANUAL This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures adjustments and specifications for the 1999 GM transmissions transaxles and transfer cases RETAIL SELL PRICE 50 00 SERVICE BULLETINS Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 OWNER S INFORMATION Owner publications are written directly for Owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner s manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner s Ma
77. 8 Safety Belts They re for Everyone 1 33 1 12 Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts and the Answers 1 35 1 13 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 38 1 14 Driver Position 1 50 1 21 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 53 1 22 Right Front Passenger Position 1 53 1 22 Supplemental Restraint System SRS 1 53 1 29 Center Passenger Position Rear Seat Passengers Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults Children Child Restraints Larger Children Safety Belt Extender Checking Your Restraint Systems Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash Seats and Seat Controls This section tells you how to adjust the seats and explains reclining seatbacks and head restraints Manual Front Seat You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you don t want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving yellow blue Lift the lever under the front of the seat up using a twisting motion This will unlock the seat Slide the seat to where you want it and release the lever Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place This switch is designed to control the movements of your seat cushion It is located on the left side of the driver s seat cushion To move the seat forward or rearward push the swi
78. ED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY yellow blue Scheduled Maintenance 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Check Oil Life Monitor If engine oil and filter are changed ACTUAL reset monitor See Engine oi in the Index t An Emission Control Service See footnote bo Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Replace air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Inspect fuel tank cap and lines for damage or leaks Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage Replace parts as needed An Emission Control Service See footnoteT For supercharged engines only Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as needed or every 36 months whichever occurs first See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in this section An Emission Control Service See footnoteT 37 500 Miles 62 500 km Check Oil Life Monitor If engine oil and filter are changed reset monitor See Engine Oil in the Index MILEAGE SERVIC An Emission Control Service See footnote a Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 7 yellow blue Scheduled Maintenance 45 000 Miles 75 000 km Check Oil Life Monitor If engine oil and filter are change
79. EL light on the instrument panel comes on it means you need to check your engine oil level right away LOW OIL LEVEL For more information see Low Oil Level Light in the Index You should check your engine oil level regularly this is an added reminder It s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground 6 13 yellow blue The engine oil dipstick handle is the yellow loop near Checking Engine Oil the front of the engine Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level 3100 Engine 3100 Engine 3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you don t the oil dipstick might not show the actual level 6 14 3800 Engine When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is at or below the ADD mark then you ll need to add at least one quart of oil But you must use the right kind This part explains what kind of oil to use For crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications in the Index yellow blue NOTICE Don t add too much oil If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range your engine could be damaged 3100 Engine 3800 or 3800
80. Engine Cooling System 00 005 7 18 Exhaust Systems 0 ce cee eee eee eee 7 18 Front Drive Axle Boot 0 00 0c e eens 7 18 Front Drive Axle Seal 00 00 00 cee eee 7 18 SIGEDHIB uides rs Lo eua dap eee aye ee hs 7 18 Inspections Continued SUSPENSION 2r csi ere ERa vex o Rebum DR 7 18 Throttle System 0 cee eee eee eese eee 7 19 Oe Wii NUES 5 24 Jump Starting cca iore ec ex esd ees RE 5 3 Key in the Ignition 0000 00 00 eee 2 23 Key Lock Cylinders Service 000 7 15 Key Reminder Warning 00 00 ce eee eaee 2 27 Keyless Entry icum 2 9 Battery Replacement 0 002000 2 10 Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle 2 10 Resynchronization else 2 11 Keys ores Re VDA PEE OER ea ee QUEE 2 2 Labels Certification Tire 0 0 eee eee eee eee 4 32 Service Parts Identification 0 6 59 9 6 yellow blue Tire Loading Information esses 4 32 Vehicle Identification Number 6 59 Lamps jou 2 54 Delayed Illumination seeseeeeesse 2 13 Exit Lighting reres kes eee m nn 2 13 PxtenOr 24 3 44 teat cle IU ER canes aes 2 51 Ino pL EET 2 54 Reading seine eife edant brand 2 56 Latches Seatback 0 0 0 ccc cee ee eee 1 6 Leaving Your Vehicle 2 0 0 cece ee eee eee 2 7 Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engi
81. KG RE UU ER aa ea EE Ter REEF ears 6 57 Finish ecepitbeexb ewige d ed Weed deeds 6 57 Sheet Metal uie esce eed eec HERI rene 6 57 Daytime Running Lamps 00005 2 52 Dead Battery 2 t RR RRRRRERR Ry 5 3 Defects Reporting Safety 00000 8 12 Defensive Driving 0 e eee eee eee 4 2 Defogger Rear Window 0 00 00 eee 3 8 DefOg eine cesare eer s e ated eA eben ite tres gs 3 8 Defros ng i em pot Rh bre cec en ce dnd 3 8 Delayed Illumination eleeeeeee eee 2 55 DIG a d pev oa baee ee ee oer er 2 86 Dimensions Vehicle 0000 e eee eeaee 6 68 Disabilities GM Mobility Program for Persons 8 7 Disarming with the Key 0000 2 25 Disarming with the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter 2 25 Dolby B Noise Reduction 00005 3 13 Door Ajar Light oat pre ee eRPRT RII RS 2 87 2 91 LOCKS 5 cacy cep tenn Siena case We ndod cart aa eea Sete T 2 4 Drive Automatic Transaxle 000005 2 34 Driver Information Center 00000005 2 86 English Metric Button 200002000 2 90 Mode Button 0 0 0 0 ccc eee 2 90 Reset Buttom sicr s Saat ie daa Der D dae ead es 2 90 Driver Position 0 0000s 1 13 Driving City T EET 4 21 D fensiye ss s bus ter Peer Lx ERE UE 4 2 Drunken 2t ae RE REDE ATE ENS 4 3 Freeway iets eisni i ena eic pt a atate S beans 4 22 In Foreign Countries
82. Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty alternative transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program Please consult your dealer for details General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion General Motors and participating dealerships reserve the right to deny a rental vehicle to anyone not possessing a valid motor vehicle operators license in their name anyone who is under the influence of alcohol or drugs or anyone whose mental or physical abilities are impaired so as to be unable to operate a motor vehicle safely Warranty Information Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet that contains detailed warranty information 8 11 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or General Motors
83. NLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter only the driver s door will unlock If you press UNLOCK again within five seconds all the doors will unlock If you would like all doors to unlock the first time you press UNLOCK see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index If your vehicle is equipped with yellow blue the Content Theft Deterrent system the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter will disarm the system See Content Theft Deterrent in the Index for more details Remote All Door Lock To lock all doors press LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter see Power Door Locks in the Index for more details on power door lock features If your vehicle is equipped with the Content Theft Deterrent system the LOCK button may arm the system See Content Theft Deterrent in the Index for more details Remote Lock Unlock Confirmation If Equipped This feature provides feedback to the holder of the remote keyless entry transmitter that a command has been received by the keyless entry receiver To signal that a command has been received the headlamps will flash and the horn will sound briefly To program the various modes available see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index Remote Alarm If Equipped When you press the horn button on the remote keyless entry transmitter the headlamps will flash and the horn will sound This will allow you to attract attention if needed 2 9
84. ORY or RUN 3 Turn the radio off 4 Press the and 4 buttons together Hold them down until shows on the display Next you will use the secret code number which you have written down yellow blue 5 Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display 6 Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code 7 Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code 8 Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show REP to let you know that you need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your secret code 9 Press AM FM and this time the display will show SEC to let you know that your radio is secure Note that with the ignition off the THEFTLOCK LED indicator will flash indicating a secured radio 3 23 Unlocking the Theft Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss Enter your secret code as follows pause no more than 15 seconds between steps 1 Tum the ignition on LOC will appear on the display 2 Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display 3 Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code 4 Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code 5 Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show SEC indicating the radio is now operable and secure If you enter the wrong code eight times INOP will appear o
85. Sometimes as when you re driving on snow or ice it s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide That means you can lose control of your vehicle 4 6 yellow blue Braking Braking action involves perception time and reaction time First you have to decide to push on the brake pedal That s perception time Then you have to bring up your foot and do it That s reaction time Average reaction time is about 3 4 of a second But that s only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in 3 4 of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it s pavement or gravel the condition of the road wet dry icy tire tread the condition of your brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a
86. That can make it overheat damaging the lighter and the heating element yellow blue Sun Visors To block out glare you can swing down the visors You can also swing them from front to side Visor Vanity Mirrors Open the cover to expose the vanity mirror If the vehicle has the optional lighted vanity mirrors the lamps come on when you open the cover 2 63 OnStar System Option OnStar is a vehicle communications service which may be ordered through your dealer The following OnStar services are available 24 hours a day Roadside Service with Location Emergency Services Button Remote Door Unlock Theft Vehicle Tracking Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment Concierge Customer Conveniences Services For more information contact the dealer Accessory Power Outlet If Equipped If the vehicle has a center console or the optional overhead console you have a 12 volt outlet On the center console it is located on the passenger s side near the floor and on the overhead console It is located in front of the reading lamps in a small black door Remove the tethered cap to use the outlet 2 64 yellow blue NOTICE Adding electrical equipment to the vehicle can damage it or keep other things from working as they should This wouldn t be covered by the warranty Check with the dealer before adding electrical equipment and never use anything requiring more than 20 amps Purse o
87. Tire and Tools 0 0 0 000005 5 31 Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow 5 33 SUN VISOIS psi sei nie Fete eb S ce vere Pre Seba 2 63 Sunglasses Storage 2 2 0 eee eee eee ee eee 2 59 DUNLOOL PREND EE 2 65 Supercharged Engine 0 00 000005 6 13 Supercharger Oil 6 21 Supplemental Restraint System 0 1 22 Symbols Vehicle 1 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee v Tachometer TIPP 2 69 Taillamp Bulb Replacement 00 6 40 Tape Player Care neidat inei enag EnA 3 27 TCS Off Light eiie eere ret eve tS 2 73 2 91 TCS Switch i uieexc ee eReERREE D SIR ERR 2 91 QUID ERE a a reaa aa 2 23 Theft Deterrent Alarm System 0 2 24 Theft Deterrent Feature 00 00 0000 aee 3 22 THBEETEOCK sei eant ere e d oh 3 22 Thermostat iere EY RUM Saves Be 6 25 Third Position Automatic Transaxle 2 34 Wilt Wheel i eee mre rp ewes E LAN 2 46 Time Set ng the sess ere eh eR epe 3 10 Tire Chainsin anae ye eva Eg ra Ene 6 50 Tire Loading ice hee Oe mE ERE UE 4 32 TES rerio RU Ert guide ees 6 43 Alignment and Balance 0 005 6 48 Buying NEW i c kie X b sepes Maan obra 6 46 CHAINS ever et Aa ade e EORR ec pde 6 50 Changing a Flat 15 ecrp trm entem 5 22 Cl aning esr Rer pe em cm Rise Dna 6 56 Compact Spare sacs coda eer hme seisis hh rrt 5 32 Tritlationr suerte meme es eres 6 44 Inflation Check oe e Rp Ren 7 14
88. a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete Don t smoke while pumping gasoline Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like gasoline oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine yellow blue Hood Release To open the hood first pull the handle inside the vehicle It is located at the lower left hand side of the vehicle near the parking brake Next go to the front of the vehicle and release the secondary hood release Lift the hood yellow When you open the hood of the 3100 engine you ll see A Windshield Washer Fluid E Power Steering Fluid Reservoir H Automatic Transaxle Dipstick B Battery F Engine Oil Fill Cap L Brake Fluid Reservoir C Radiator Fill Cap G Engine Oil Dipstick J Engine Air Cleaner Filter D Engine Coolant Reservoir yellow When you open the hood of the 3800 engine you ll see A Windshield Washer Fluid E Power Steering Fluid Reservoir H Automatic Transaxle Dipstick low in engine compartment B Battery Ti I Brake Fluid Reservoir Radi Fill F Engine Oil Fill Cap Co Radiator PI Cap G Engine Oil Di
89. ady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service If the Light Is On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle If so reinstall the fuel cap making sure to fully install the cap See Filling Your Tank in the Index The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water If so your electrical system may be wet The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off Are you low on fuel As your engine starts to run out of fuel your engine may not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts of air are sucked into the fuel line causing a misfire The system can detect this Adding fuel should correct this condition Make sure to install the fuel cap properly See Filling Your Tank in the Index It will take a few driving trips to turn the light off yellow blue Have you recently changed brands of fuel If so be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel see Fuel i
90. after all the doors have been closed so that you can find the ignition and buckle the seat belt at night Delayed Illumination will not occur while the ignition is in RUN or ACCESSORY After 25 seconds have elapsed the interior lamps will slowly fade out The lamps will fade out before the 25 seconds have elapsed if you Tum the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY Lock all doors using the remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped Lock the doors using the power door lock switch To turn Delayed Illumination feature off or on see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index yellow blue Exit Lighting For exiting the vehicle at night the vehicle is equipped with the Exit Lighting feature The interior lamps will illuminate for up to 25 seconds when you remove the key from the ignition After 25 seconds have elapsed the interior lamps will slowly fade out The lamps will fade out before the 25 seconds have elapsed if you Insert the key and turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY Lock all doors using the remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped Lock the doors using the power door lock switch When any door is opened Exit Lighting is canceled The interior lamps will stay on while any door is opened and will slowly fade out when all the doors are closed The interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds after all the doors have been closed if they have not been locked See Delayed Illumination earl
91. aight in your seat the HUD image will appear straight ahead near the front bumper yellow blue When the ignition key is turned to RUN the HUD To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly image will come on Then the Head Up Display will operate normally NOTICE Although the HUD image appears yo be near the front of the vehicle do not use it as a parking aid The HUD was not designed for that purpose If you try to use it that way such as in a parking lot you may misjudge distance and run into something When the HUD is on the speedometer reading will be displayed continually The current radio station or CD 1 track number will only be displayed for three seconds after the radio or CD track status changes This will Start your engine and turn the DIM dial to the desired HUD image brightness happen whenever one of the radio controls is pressed 2 Adjust your seat if necessary to a either on the radio itself or on the optional steering comfortable position wheel controls 3 Press the top of the UP DN switch until the HUD image stops moving Then press the bottom of the switch until the image is as low as possible but in full view 2 83 4 Turn the DIM dial down until the HUD image is no brighter than necessary To turn the HUD off turn the DIM dial all the way down If the sun comes out it becomes cloudy or if you turn on your headlamps you may need to adjust the HUD brightness again Polarized sungl
92. an is not working If you have been operating the vehicle under normal driving conditions you should pull off the road stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible In Problems on the Road this manual shows what to do See Engine Overheating in the Index 2 79 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage You have a gage that shows the engine coolant temperature If the gage pointer moves into the red area the engine is too hot That reading means the same thing as the warning light It means that the engine coolant has overheated If you have been operating the vehicle under normal driving conditions you should pull off the road stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible In Problems on the Road this manual shows what to do See Engine Overheating in the Index 2 80 yellow blue Low Coolant Warning Light If this light comes on the system is low on coolant LOW and the engine may COOLANT overheat See Engine Coolant in the Index and have the vehicle serviced as soon as you can Fuel Gage The fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have left when the ignition is on When the indicator nears E EMPTY you still have a little fuel left but you should get more soon Here are four things that some owners ask about All these things are normal and do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage Atthe gas station the pump shuts off before the ga
93. aning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Don t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that yellow blue contain acid or abrasives All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface or they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a vehicle washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Your vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish 6 55 NOTICE Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage
94. ant restraint The instructions for the restraint will say whether it is the right type and size for your child A very young child s hip bones are so small that a regular belt might not stay low on the hips as it should Instead the belt will likely be over the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force right on the child s abdomen which could cause serious or fatal injuries So be sure that any child small enough for one is always properly restrained in a child or infant restraint 1 36 yellow blue Infants need complete support including support for the head and neck This is necessary because an infant s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a frontal crash an infant in a rear facing restraint settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of the infant s body the back and shoulders A baby should be secured in an appropriate infant restraint This is so important that many hospitals today won t release a newborn infant to its parents unless there is an infant restraint available for the baby s first trip in a motor vehicle blue CAUTION Continued at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 Ib 5 5 kg baby will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110 kg force on your arms The baby would be almost impossible to hold Secure the baby in an infant restraint Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a vehicle A baby doesn t
95. ard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn t be covered by your warranty To check on fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you ll be driving You can also write us at the following address for advice Just tell us where you re going and give your Vehicle Identification Number VIN General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 yellow blue Filling Your Tank The cap is behind the fuel door on the driver s side of your vehicle While refueling hang the cap by the tether from the pin on the fuel door A NM To remove the cap turn it slowly to the left Gasoline vapor is highly flammable It burns counterclockwise The cap has a spring in it if you let violently and that can cause very bad injuries go of the cap too soon it will spring back to the right Don t smoke if you re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from gasoline If you get gasoline on yourself and then something ignites it you could be badly burned Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the fuel filler cap too quickly This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel filler cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to s
96. arking on any hill see Towing a Trailer in the Index That section shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving Shifting Into PARK P It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground use the steps that follow If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index yellow blue Column Shift 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake Move the shift lever into PARK P position 1 ike this Pull the lever toward you 2 37 yellow blue Console Shift 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake 2 Move the shift lever into PARK P position like this Move the lever up as far as it will go 3 Tum the ignition key to LOCK 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand the vehicle is in PARK P Press in and hold the shift knob button located on the front of the shift knob Push the shift knob all the way toward the front of the vehicle 2 38 3 Tum the ignition key to LOCK 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave the vehicle with the ign
97. asses could make the HUD image harder to see Push the ENG MET button on the trip calculator to switch the HUD display from English to metric or f metric to English If your EN ET ME vehicle is not equipped with the trip calculator you can t i change the display 2 84 yellow blue Care of the Head Up Display Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity of the HUD image To clean the HUD spray household glass cleaner on a soft clean cloth Wipe the HUD lens gently then dry it Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because the cleaner could leak into the unit If You Can t See the HUD Image When the Ignition Is On Isanything covering the HUD unit Isthe HUD dimmer setting bright enough Isthe HUD image adjusted to the proper height Still no HUD image Check the fuse in the instrument panel fuse block See Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index If the HUD Image Is Not Clear Isthe HUD image too bright Are the windshield and HUD lens clean The windshield is part of the HUD system If you ever have to have a new windshield be sure to get one designed for HUD If you don t the HUD image may look blurred and out of focus yellow blue Power Drop Feature The vehicle is equipped with auxiliary power leads These leads can be used to power aftermarket electrical equipment added to the vehicle The
98. atches fire because you keep driving with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty If your vehicle has the 3100 V6 engine see Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode in the Index If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you Climb a long hill on a hot day Stop after high speed driving Idle for long periods in traffic Tow a trailer If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so 1 If your air conditioner is on turn it off 2 Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary 3 If you re in a traffic jam shift to NEUTRAL N otherwise shift to the highest gear while driving or DRIVE D or THIRD 3 yellow blue If you no longer have the overheat warning you can drive Just to be safe drive slower for about 10 minutes If the warning doesn t come back on you can drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park your vehicle right away If there s still no sign of steam idle the engine for three minutes while you re parked If you still have the warning turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down If your vehicle has the 3100 V6 engine see Ov
99. ation 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until SET appears on the display Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton yellow blue Setting the Tone BASS Slide the lever to the right or left to increase or decrease bass TREBLE Slide the lever to the right or left to increase or decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Adjusting the Speakers BAL Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn this knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn this knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them 3 11 Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player While the tape is playing use the VOL FADE BAL BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio The display will show an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing When the down indicator arrow is lit selections listed on the bottom side of the cassette are playing When the up arrow is lit selections listed on the top
100. avy snow or ice can overload the wipers A circuit breaker will stop them until the motor cools Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload 2 48 yellow blue Windshield Washer At the top of the multifunction lever there s a paddle with the word PUSH on it To spray washer fluid on the windshield push the paddle The wipers will run for several sweeps and then either stop or return to your preset speed See Windshield Washer Fluid in the Index In freezing weather don t use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision Cruise Control If Equipped With cruise control you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator This can really help on long trips Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h When you apply the brakes the cruise control shuts off Cruise control can be dangerous where you can t drive safely at a steady speed So don t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning and you could lose control Don t use cruise control on slippery roads yellow blue If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control system on the 3800 Supercharged V6 engine or the enhanced traction syst
101. away from having your concern taken care of yellow blue The PONTIAC CARES philosophy and elements are designed to make you realize that Pontiac recognizes you as a valuable customer appreciates your purchase decision and is dedicated to taking care of the most important person YOU PONTIAC CARES is A valuable feature that comes with every Pontiac a feature that offers a multitude of benefits that can give you safety security comfort and convenience yellow blue What Makes Up Pontiac Cares Customer Satisfaction Procedure A3 year 36 000 mile 60 000 km Bumper to Bumper Warranty Customer Assistance Roadside Assistance Courtesy Transportation All of these elements combine to make your driving experience an enjoyable one and are discussed in greater detail in your owner s manual Pontiac is focusing on the changing needs of our customers and is committed to giving you an exceptional level of customer care throughout your ownership experience Our goal is to create total customer enthusiasm in our product and our services and make you the most satisfied customer in the world Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Pontiac Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your con
102. ble to power lock the doors When you press LOCK on the power door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped while any door is open the doors will not lock Instead you will hear three chimes which let you know that the Last Door Closed Locking feature is in operation Five seconds after all the doors are closed all the doors will automatically lock To customize these features to your preference see Programmable Modes following 2 15 Programmable Modes Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes Mode 1 Both Features Off Doors will always lock immediately when you press LOCK on the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped Mode 2 Lockout Prevention Only If you leave your key in the ignition with the driver s door open you will not be able to lock the doors using your power locks Mode 3 Last Door Closed Locking Only If the power door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped is used to lock the vehicle while any door is open and the key is out of the ignition you will hear three chimes The doors will not lock Five seconds after the last door is closed all doors will lock Mode 4 Both Features On This combines modes 2 and 3 Your vehicle comes with this feature set in mode 4 To change the mode do the following 1 Follow the instructions for Entering Programming Mode listed previously 2 Press unlock
103. c TAPE PLAY Press this button to play a CD if you have a magazine loaded in the changer and the radio is playing To return to the radio while a CD is playing press AM FM You can also press this button to switch between a cassette tape and CD if both are loaded 3 22 yellow blue Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your radio It works by using a secret code to disable all radio functions whenever battery power is removed The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or ignored If ignored the system plays normally and the radio is not protected by the feature If THEFTLOCK is activated your radio will not operate if stolen When THEFTLOCK is activated the radio will display LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery power is removed If your battery loses power for any reason you must unlock the radio with the secret code before it will operate Activating the Theft Deterrent Feature The instructions which follow explain how to enter your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system It is recommended that you read through all nine steps before starting the procedure NOTE If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between any steps the radio automatically reverts to time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4 1 Write down any three or four digit number from 000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from the vehicle 2 Turn the ignition to ACCESS
104. cal connector and replace the connector Carefully replace the headlamp assembly Be careful to avoid scratching or chipping the paint on the vehicle while replacing the assembly Replace the two bolts on the top of the headlamp assembly Close the hood yellow 1 Open the hood and support properly 2 Remove the two bolts from the top of the headlamp assembly 3 Carefully remove the headlamp assembly from the vehicle Be careful to avoid scratching or chipping the paint on the vehicle while replacing 4 Turn the front sidemarker bulb socket a quarter of a turn counterclockwise to remove yellow Remove the bulb from the socket 6 Place the new bulb into the socket 7 Turn the bulb socket a quarter of a turn clockwise to replace it 2 Reach through the access opening in the trunk and remove the slotted vent by squeezing the ends and 8 Carefully replace the headlamp assembly Be pulling down careful to avoid scratching or chipping the paint on the vehicle while replacing 9 Replace the two bolts on the top of the headlamp assembly 10 Close the hood yellow Unhook the convenience net if equipped and remove 3 Remove the bulb by turning it a quarter of a turn counterclockwise 4 Place the new bulb into the bulb socket 5 Turn the bulb a quarter of a turn clockwise to 2 replace Replace the vent you removed earlier 6 Close the trunk Unscrew the upper convenienc
105. can see clearly when you are sitting in a comfortable driving position Inside Day Night Rearview Mirror To reduce glare from lamps behind you pull the lever toward you to the night position To return the mirror back to the day position push the lever away from you yellow blue Electrochromic Day Night Rearview Mirror If Equipped The vehicle may have an electrochromic day night rearview mirror Push the button on the bottom of the mirror to turn this feature on The mirror will darken gradually to reduce glare from headlamps behind you This may take a few moments 2 57 One photocell on the front of the mirror senses when it is becoming dark outside Another photocell facing rearward senses headlamps behind you To turn the electrochromic feature off press the button on the bottom of the mirror again To keep the photocells operating well occasionally clean them with a cotton swab and glass cleaner Power Outside Mirrors The power mirror control is near the driver s window on the armrest Turn the control counterclockwise to adjust the left mirror or clockwise to adjust the right mirror Then move the control in the direction you want to move the mirror 2 58 yellow blue Convex Outside Mirror Your passenger s side mirror is convex A convex mirror s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver s seat A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than th
106. ce as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision For example if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night But if you re driving don t wear sunglasses at night They may cut down on glare from headlamps but they also make a lot of things invisible 4 17 You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps It can take a second or two or even several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the dark When you are faced with severe glare as from a driver who doesn t lower the high beams or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps slow down a little Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve Keep your eyes moving that way it s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim so should your eyes be examined regularly Some drivers suffer from night blindness the inability to see in dim light and
107. ce damage Use the extension and protector guide located in the foam holder To store a full size tire place the tire in the trunk valve stem facing down with the protector guide through a wheel bolt hole Remove the protector and attach the retainer securely When reinstalling the compact spare put the protector guide back in the foam holder Store the cover as far forward as possible yellow blue Storing the Spare Tire and Tools Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place The compact spare is for temporary use only Replace the compact spare tire with a full size tire as soon as you can See Compact Spare Tire in the Index See the storage instructions label to replace your compact spare in your trunk properly Be sure to calibrate your check tire pressure system after you replace your compact spare tire with a full sized one See Check Tire Pressure Light in the Index 5 31 1 Retainer Cover Retainer Full Size Spare Tire Nut Jack Wrench Lock Nut Tool Foam Bolt Screw Nut Extension and Protector Guide yellow blue Compact Spare Tire Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when your vehicle was new it can lose air after a time Check the inflation pressure regularly It should be 60 p
108. cern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help contact the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling 1 800 PM CARES 1 800 762 2737 In Canada contact GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French yellow blue We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative Vehicle Identification Number This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield Dealership name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting Pontiac please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern STEP THREE Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making
109. cle Symbols These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle For example These symbols These symbols These symbols these symbols are important have to do with are on some of are used on an for you and your lamps your controls original battery your passengers ren INT MASTER Flo WINDSHIELD CAUTION driven LIGHTING WIPER POSSIBLE SWITCH e DOOR LOCK PROTECT UNLOCK EYES BY SHIELDING INJURY TURN WINDSHIELD SIGNALS WASHER PARKING M LAMPS M HAZARD WARNING FLASHER WINDOW POWER DAYTIME DEFOGGER wiNDow RUNNING D LAMPS CAUSTIC WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER BURNS AVOID SPARKS OR FLAMES BATTERY FASTEN ACID COULD ke SEAT CAUSE BELTS SPARKOR ali DONIS Ew VENTILATING EXPLODE AIR BAG TN FOG LAMPS x BATTERY These symbols are used on warning and indicator lights ENGINE COOLANT TEMP BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM BRAKE COOLANT ENGINE OIL PRESSURE ANTI LOCK BRAKES F Da a D Daa 71 us yellow blue Here are some other symbols you may see FUSE M 2 LIGHTER oc HORN pey SPEAKER n FUEL yellow blue f NOTES vi yellow blue Y Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Here you ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts 1 2 Seats and Controls 1 30 1
110. corner of the instrument panel on the driver s side You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration yellow blue Engine Identification The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code This code will help you identify your engine specifications and replacement parts Service Parts Identification Label You ll find this label on the underside of your trunk lid It s very helpful if you ever need to order parts On this label is your VIN the model designation paint information and e a list of all production options and special equipment Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle 6 59 Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment NOTICE Don t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn t be covered by your warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle in the Index Headlamp Wiring The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in the instrument panel fuse block An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off o
111. d reset monitor See Engine Oil in the Index MILEAGE i An Emission Control Service See footnote bo Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Replace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnote T Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven ACTUAL under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter at 100 000 miles 166 000 km 7 8 Scheduled Maintenance 52 500 Miles 87 500 km Check Oil Life Monitor If engine oil and filter are changed reset monitor See Engine Oil in the Index An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Check Oil Life Monitor If engine oil and filter are changed reset monitor See Engine Oil in the Index An Emission Control Se
112. d who performed the service the following record pages Also you should retain all in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval maintenance receipts Your owner information portfolio Any additional information from Owner Checks and is a convenient place to store them Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED yellow blue Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED yellow blue Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED yellow blue Y Section 8 Customer Assistance Information Here you will find out how to contact Pontiac if you need assistance This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects 8 2 Pontiac Cares 8 10 Courtesy Transportation 8 3 What Makes Up Pontiac Cares 8 11 Warranty Information 8 3 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 8 12 Reporting Safety Defects to the United 8 5 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone States Government TTY Users 8 12 Reporting Safety Defects to the 8 5 Customer Assistance Offices Canadian Government 8 7 GM Mobility Program for Persons 8 13 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors with Disabilities 8 13 Ordering Service and Owner Publications 8 8 Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program in Canada 8 9 Canadian Roadside Assistance Pontiac Cares y oNTI c With PONTIAC CARES you are never more than a phone call
113. ded At Least Once a Year Key Lock Cylinders Service Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D Body Lubrication Service Lubricate all hood hinges hood latch assembly secondary latch pivots spring anchor release pawl door hinges rear compartment glove box door console door and any folding seat hardware Part D tells you what to use More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment 7 15 yellow blue Starter Switch Check Brake Transaxle Shift Interlock BTSI Check When you are doing this check the vehicle could When you are doing this check the vehicle could move suddenly If it does you or others could be move suddenly If it does you or others could be injured Follow the steps below injured Follow the steps below 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room 1 Before you start be sure you have enough around the vehicle room around the vehicle It should be parked on a 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake see Parking level surface Brake in the Index if necessary and the 2 Firmly apply the parking brake see Parking Brake regular brake in the Index if necessary NOTE Do not use the accelerator pedal and be NOTE Be ready to apply the regular brake ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts immediately if the vehicle begins to move 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The starter 3 With the engine off
114. defogger will only run for about five minutes before turning off You can also turn it off by pressing the button again Do not attach anything like a temporary vehicle license or decal across the defogger grid NOTICE Don t use a razor blade or anything else sharp on Adjust the direction of airflow by moving the the inside of the rear window If you do you louvered vents could cut or damage the warming grid and the Your vehicle s flow through ventilation system supplies repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty outside air into the vehicle when it is moving Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the air conditioning fan is running Ventilation Tips Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice snow or any other obstruction such as leaves The heater and defroster will work far better reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows 3 9 When you enter a vehicle in cold weather adjust the mode knob to FLOOR and the fan to the highest speed for a few seconds before driving off This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of your windows Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle Audio Systems Your Delco Electronics audio system has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you ac
115. djust your driving to the road conditions See Enhanced Traction System in the Index If you don t have the Enhanced Traction System accelerate gently Try not to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more Your anti lock brakes improve your vehicle s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road Even though you have the anti lock braking system you ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement See Anti Lock in the Index Allow greater following distance on any slippery road Watch for slippery spots The road might be fine until you hit a spot that s covered with ice On an otherwise clear road ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can t reach around clumps of trees behind buildings or under bridges Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear If you see a patch of ice ahead of you brake before you are on it Try not to brake while you re actually on the ice and avoid sudden steering maneuvers yellow blue If You re Caught in a Blizzard If you are stopped by heavy snow you could be in a serious situation You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe
116. dshield Wipers sleeeeeeeeeeeee 2 48 Blade Cleaning cedi rm Reed 6 42 Blade Replacement 0 0 00 0000 6 42 USCS EP 6 60 Winter Driving eem e Dr ees eeni edge eas ER cay 4 27 Wiper Blade Check 0 00000 eee eee 7 15 Wiper Blades Cleaning sees esses 7 15 Wiring Headlamp 0 00 eee eee eee 6 60 Wrench Wheel 0 0 0 00 ccc eee ene 5 24
117. dvice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous So please get to know your warning lights and gages They re a big help Your vehicle may also have a driver information system that works along with the warning lights and gages See Driver Information System in the Index Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to RUN or START a chime will come on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts unless the driver s safety belt is already buckled The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for about 70 seconds or until the driver s seatbelt 1s buckled If the driver s belt is already buckled neither the chime nor the light will come on Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows SRS AIR BAG The system checks the air bag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem The system check includes the air bag sensors the air bag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the air bag system see Air Bag in the Index This light will come on when you start your engine and it will flash for a few seconds Then the light should go out This means the system is ready SRS AIR BAG If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the engine or comes on when you are driving your air bag system may not work prop
118. e In most states and Canadian provinces the law says to wear safety belts Here s why They work You never know if you ll be in a crash If you do have a crash you don t know if it will be a bad one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn t survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot yellow When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Put someone on it Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it s just a seat on wheels yellow Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider The person keeps going until stopped by something doesn t stop In a real vehicle it could be the windshield or the instrument panel yellow blue or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That s why safety belts make such good sense 1 11 Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts and the Answers Q Won t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I m wearing a safety belt A You could be whether you re wearing a safety belt or no
119. e The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles 166 000 km should be performed after 100 000 miles 166 000 km at the same intervals The services shown at 150 000 miles 240 000 km should be performed at the same interval after 150 000 miles 240 000 km See Owner Checks and Services and Periodic Maintenance Inspections following Footnotes T The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded yellow blue Your vehicle has an Engine Oil Life Monitor This monitor will show you when to change the engine oil and filter usually between 3 000 miles 5 000 km and 7 500 miles 12 500 km since your last oil change Under severe conditions the indicator may come on before 3 000 miles 5 000 km Never drive your vehicle more than 7 500 miles 12 500 km or 12 months without an oil and filter change The system won t detect dust in the oil So if you drive in a dusty area be sure to change your oil and filter every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or sooner if the CHANGE OIL SOON light comes on Remember to reset the Oil Life Monitor whenever the oil is changed For more informatio
120. e vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal This could overheat and damage the transaxle Use the brakes or shift into PARK P to hold the vehicle in position on a hill yellow blue Performance Shifting If Equipped Press the performance shift button located on the side of the console shift lever to allow the transaxle to shift at higher engine speeds increasing firmness and acceleration performance If you have a vehicle with the 3800 Supercharged engine option the PERFORMANCE SHIFT message in the driver information center will come on Downshifts will occur at a lower percentage of accelerator use while you re in the performance shift mode Press the button again to return to normal shifting The transaxle will then shift at lower engine speeds increasing fuel economy 2 35 Parking Brake To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with the right foot Push down on the parking PATER brake pedal with the b left foot WELERSE To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with the right foot and push the parking brake pedal with the left foot When you lift the left foot the parking brake pedal will follow it to the released position 2 36 yellow blue NOTICE Driving with the parking brake on can cause the rear brakes to overheat You may have to replace them and you could also damage other parts of the vehicle If you are towing a trailer and p
121. e 1 12 3 quarts 11 7 L Refrigerant R 134a Air Conditioning 1 9 Ibs 0 85 kg Engine Crankcase Oil Change with Filter Change 3100 Code M 4 5 quarts 4 3 L 3800 Code K 4 5 quarts 4 3 L 3800 Supercharged Code 1 4 5 quarts 4 3 L Fuel Tank 17 7 gallons 67 L See Air Conditioning Refrigerants later in this section Note All capacities are approximate When adding fluid be sure to fill to the appropriate level as recommended in this manual Recheck fluid level after filling See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index for more information 3100 Code M Engine Specifications TYPE caesus che eR are ye RE RR CRUS T RR V6 Displacement 191 CID 3 1L L82 Firing Order 00 1 2 3 4 5 6 Thermostat Temperature 195 F 91 C HorsepoWer i see cea nde oe hrs 160 3800 Code K Engine Specifications Type iue She ee ae ea Or RA RE MS Rud V6 Displacement 231 CID 3 8L L36 Firing Order essen 1 6 5 4 3 2 Thermostat Temperature 195 F 91 C Horsepower c ue e n eSNG EE oS 200 yellow blue 3800 Supercharged Code 1 Engine Specifications jio PEE V6 Displacement 231 CID 3 8L L67 Firing Order visu Rn 1 6 5 4 3 2 Thermostat Temperature 195 F 91 C HotrsepoWeE i eere pk eR Reg weaned 240 6 67 Air Conditioning Refrige
122. e GM parts and GM trained and supported service people We hope you ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACDelco Genuine Parts Eq Goodwrench yellow blue Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do some of your own service work you ll want to use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Index Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle in the Index You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform See Maintenance Record in the Index You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it Besure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If you use the wrong fasteners parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it This may cause wind
123. e Index 2 91 yellow blue f NOTES 2 92 yellow blue Y Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems In this section you ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle 3 2 Comfort Controls 3 19 Trunk Mounted CD Changer Option 3 2 Air Conditioning with Electronic Controls 3 22 Theft Deterrent Feature 3 4 Air Conditioning with Automatic and 3 25 Audio Steering Wheel Controls If Equipped Auxiliary Temperature Control If Equipped 3 26 Understanding Radio Reception 3 8 Rear Window Defogger 3 26 Tips About Your Audio System 3 0 Ventilation System 3 27 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player 3 10 Audio Systems 3 28 Care of Your Compact Discs 3 10 Setting the Clock 3 28 Care of Your Compact Disc Player 3 10 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player 3 28 Fixed Mast Antenna 3 14 AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player 3 29 Backglass Antenna If Equipped If Equipped 3 16 AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Equalizer If Equipped Comfort Controls Air Conditioning with Electronic Controls With this system you can control the heating cooling and ventilation in your vehicle The system works best if you keep your windows closed while using it Fan Knob The left knob selects the amount of air you want To turn the fan off turn the knob to OFF The fan must be on to run the air conditioning compre
124. e SAE 10W 30 if it s going to be 0 F 18 C or above These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 yellow blue RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING SELECT THE LOWEST SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE HOT FOR THIS WEATHER SYMBOL F T SAE 10W 30 PREFERRED above 0 F 18 C SAE SW 30 COLD WEATHER DO NOT USE SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED 3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine 6 17 As shown in the chart if you have the 3800 V6 engine SAE 10W 30 is best for your vehicle However you can use SAE 5W 30 if it s going to be colder than 60 F 16 C before your next oil change When it s very cold you should use SAE 5W 30 These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 NOTICE Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines Starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty 6 18 yellow blue GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle If you are in an area where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C consider using either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W 30 oil Both will provide easier cold starting and bette
125. e body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up Ill be careful isn t the right answer What if there s an emergency a need to take sudden action as when a child darts into the street A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision There s something else about drinking and driving that many people don t know Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking yellow blue Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Please don t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you re with a group designate a driver who will not drink Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go They are the brakes the steering and the accelerator All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road
126. e front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Playing a Compact Disc Insert a disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in If the ignition and the radio are on the disc will begin playing If you want to insert a disc when the ignition is off first press EJECT If you re driving on a very rough road or if it s very hot the disc may not play and E error and a number may appear on the radio display If the disc comes out it could be that The disc is upside down Itis dirty scratched or wet The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again 3 17 If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected please contact your dealer If your radio displays an error number write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem PREV 1 Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played If you hold the button or press it more than once the player will continue moving back through the disc NEXT 2 Press this button or the SEEK up arrow to go to the start of the next track If you hold the button or press it more than once the player will continue moving forward through the disc RDM 3 Press this button to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential
127. e must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT or SEEK to work The tape direction arrow blinks during NEXT or SEEK operation Press NEXT or the SEEK up arrow to stop searching The sound will mute during NEXT or SEEK operation PROG 3 Press this button to play the other side of the tape DO 4 Press this button to reduce background noise Note that the double D symbol will appear on the display Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation REV 5 Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly Press it again to return to playing speed The radio will play the last selected station while the tape reverses You may select stations during REV operation by using SEEK or TUNE FWD 6 Press this button to advance quickly to another part of the tape Press the button again to return to playing speed The radio will play the last selected station while the tape advances You may select stations during FWD operation by using SEEK or TUNE AM FM Press this button to play the radio when a tape is in the player TAPE PLAY Press this button to change to the tape function when the radio is on The tape symbol with an arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active To return to playing the radio press the AM FM button yellow blue EJECT Press t
128. e net hook attachment 3 Pull the trunk trim carpeting back from the rear of the trunk 4 Remove the upper trunk trim hook and the two plastic wing nuts from the taillamp yellow 5 Carefully remove the taillamp assembly Be 6 Turn the lamp socket a quarter of a turn careful to avoid scratching or chipping the paint on counterclockwise to remove the vehicle 10 11 12 Remove the bulb Place the new bulb into the socket Turn the lamp socket a quarter of a turn clockwise to replace it Carefully replace the taillamp assembly Be careful to avoid scratching or chipping the vehicle paint Reverse Steps 1 through 4 Close the rear compartment yellow Windshield wiper blades should be inspected as least twice a year for wear or cracking See Wiper Blade Check in Section 7 of this manual under Part B Owner Checks and Services for more information Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways For the proper type and length see Normal Maintenance and Replacement Parts in the Index Here s how to remove the wiper blade 1 Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield 2 Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly toward the driver s side of the vehicle 3 Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2 Tires Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions ab
129. e played only with specially designed trays Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine slide open the door of the compact disc CD changer Push the magazine into the changer in the direction of the You must first load the magazine with discs before you arrow marked on top of the magazine can play a compact disc Each of the 12 trays holds one disc Press the button on the back of the magazine and pull gently on one of the trays Load the trays from bottom to top placing a disc on the tray label side down 3 19 Close the door by sliding it all the way to the left If the door is left partially open the changer will not operate and an error will occur When the door is closed the changer will begin checking for discs in the magazine This will continue for up to two minutes depending on the number of discs loaded To eject the magazine from the player slide the CD changer door all the way open The magazine will automatically eject Remember to keep the door closed whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from getting inside the changer 3 20 yellow blue All of the CD functions are controlled by the radio buttons except for ejecting the magazine Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the changer the compact disc symbol will appear on the radio display If the CD changer is checking the magazine for CDs the compact disc symbol will flash on the display until the changer is ready to play When a CD be
130. e still won t start or starts but then stops it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for about three seconds If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again do the same thing but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds This clears the extra gasoline from the engine After waiting about 15 seconds repeat the normal starting procedure NOTICE Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer If you don t your engine might not perform properly If you ever have to have your vehicle towed see the part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle See Towing Your Vehicle in the Index 2 30 yellow blue Engine Coolant Heater If Equipped In very cold weather 0 F 18 C or colder the engine coolant heater can help You ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up Usually the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle To Use the Engine Coolant Heater l 2 Turn off the engine Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord The cord is located below the air cleaner near the coolant reservoir bottle Plug i
131. e the cruise control switch to ON s Take Jour foot ol tneaceeleraian penal The accelerate feature will only work after you set the Resuming a Set Speed cruise control speed by pushing the SET button Suppose you set the cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake This of course shuts off the cruise control But you don t need to reset it 2 50 Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to reduce your speed while using cruise control Pushin the SET button until you reach the lower speed you want then release it To slow down in very small amounts push the SET button for less than half a second Each time you do this you ll go 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed When you take your foot off the pedal the vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier Using Cruise Control on Hills How well the cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed When going downhill you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down Of course applying the brake takes you out of cruise control Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don t use cruise control on steep hills yellow blue Ending Cruise Contro
132. e transaxle see Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow in the Index yellow blue NEUTRAL N In this position the engine doesn t connect with the wheels To restart when you re already moving use NEUTRAL N only Also use NEUTRAL N when the vehicle is being towed Shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N while your engine is racing running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Don t shift out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N while your engine is racing NOTICE Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N with the engine racing isn t covered by your warranty 2 33 DRIVE D This position is for normal driving If you need more power for passing and you re Going less than 35 mph 55 km h push the accelerator pedal about halfway down Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator pedal all the way down You ll shift down to the next gear and have more power NOTICE If the vehicle seems to start up rather slowly or if it seems not to shift gears as you go faster something may be wrong with a transaxle system sensor If you drive very far that way the vehicle can be damaged So if this happens have the vehicle serviced right away Until then you can use SECOND 2 when you are driving less than 35 mph 55 km h and DRIVE
133. e with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any anti lock brake system ABS helps avoid only the braking skid Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue yellow blue Here are some tips on night driving Drive defensively Don t drink and drive Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you Since you can t see as well you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles Slow down especially on higher speed roads Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead n remote areas watch for animals If you re tired pull off the road in a safe place and rest Night Vision No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver may require at least twi
134. ear Seat Position 1 46 Securing in the Right Front Seat Position 1 48 Top Stfap eee meri RC R RIE RU RI ORE RR eh 1 43 Where to Put sse e IRR RESP S 1 42 Cigarette Lighter 00 0 0 0c eee eee eee 2 62 Circuit Breakers and Fuses 0000 6 60 Cleaner Ait peere tinie odes Reba ceee eti petens 6 20 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels 000 000 eese 6 56 Exterior Lamps Lenses 002005 6 55 llo CP 6 51 Glass Surfaces zi sre uet Ree ERR 6 54 Inside of Your Vehicle 0 000008 6 51 Instrument Panel lsssees eese 6 53 Interior Plastic Components 0 6 53 L atli r eer Re Remy erekin enoei 6 53 Outside of Your Vehicle 0 005 6 55 Special Problems vscsireicioriiccieeisioins tia 6 52 NI TP eaae y r EAA 6 51 TES cig Ste a E E ERE EAE ues 6 56 linge ETT 6 53 Wheels seran nse deltas he ivastn dane olde te seca kad Shade obs 6 56 Windshield and Wiper Blades 6 54 Clock Setting th eer remet m ren 3 10 Column Shift eeaeee each e e t e 2 37 Comfort Controls 0 0 cece eee eee 3 2 Compact Disc Care 00 cece 3 28 Compact Disc Player 005 3 14 3 16 CATE EET 3 28 EMOS i Lo siding tado dti o PCR 3 15 3 17 Trunk Mounted CD Changer 3 19 Compact Spare Tire eese 5 32 Console Shift 122i Re Ret Eee e EUR 2 38 Console Storage Center
135. eat Here s why 1 48 yellow blue A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in the rear seat Although a rear seat is a safer place you can secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward facing child restraint See Seats in the Index 2 Putthe restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or neck put it behind the child restraint 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unb
136. ed 6 44 yellow blue NOTICE Continued If your tires have too much air overinflation you can get the following Unusual wear Bad handling Rough ride Needless damage from road hazards When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Don t forget your compact spare tire It should be at 60 psi 420 kPa How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You can t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they re underinflated Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be rotated every 6 000 to 8 000 miles 10 000 to 13 000 km Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It s Time for New Tires and Wheel Replacement later in this section for more information The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle The first rotation is the most important See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals yellow blue When rotating your tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here Don t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation After the tires have
137. eep you comfortable The air conditioning compressor will run if the outside temperature is above 38 F 3 3 C You may notice a delay of three to four minutes before the fan comes on Driver s Temperature Knob The left knob sets the temperature for the entire system when the light on DUAL button isn t lit If the light is lit the knob sets the temperature for the driver Turn the knob toward red clockwise to raise the desired cabin temperature Turn it toward blue counterclockwise to lower the temperature The display will show your selection for a few seconds then the outside temperature will show or be displayed Passenger s Temperature Knob The right knob sets the desired cabin temperature for the passenger and will automatically force the system into a dual zone operation lighting the dual zone button light Turn the right knob toward red clockwise to raise the temperature Turn it toward blue counterclockwise to lower the temperature yellow blue Dual Zone Button Light The dual zone button light indicates whether the system is in single zone or dual zone operation When there is no desire for dual zone operation push the lit dual zone button to return to single zone operation The dual zone button light will go off The system will operate to achieve your comfort set point as quick as possible If you set the temperature for 60 F 16 C or 90 F 32 C the fan will go to its highest speed unless you manually
138. ehicle slows down in frontal or near frontal impacts 1 26 yellow blue What makes an air bag inflate In an impact of sufficient severity the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator which inflates the air bag The inflator air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger How does an air bag restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel Air bags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions including rollovers rear impacts and side impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward those air bags Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions What will you see after an air bag inflates After an air bag inflates it quickly deflates so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated Some components of the air bag module the steering wheel hub for the driver s air bag or the instrument panel for the ri
139. em on the 3100 V6 and 3800 V6 engine begins to limit wheel spin the cruise control will automatically disengage See Traction Control System or Enhanced Traction System in the Index When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may turn the cruise control back on 2 49 yellow blue Setting Cruise Control Once you re going about 25 mph 40 km h or more you can move the cruise control switch from ON to R A Resume Accelerate briefly You ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control If you leave your cruise control switch on when i There are two ways to go to a higher speed you re not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you don t want to You Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed could be startled and even lose control Keep the Push in the SET button then release the button and cruise control switch off until you want to use it the accelerator pedal You ll now cruise at the higher speed Move the cruise switch from ON to R A Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want and 2 Get up to the speed you want then release the switch To increase your speed in 3 Push in the SET button at the end of the lever and very small amounts move the switch 1o R A for less Telea it than half a second and then release it Each time you do this your vehicle will go 1 mph 1 6 km h faster 1 Mov
140. en 2 4 Ignition Transaxle Lock Check 7 17 Key Lock Cylinder Service 04 7 15 Last Door Closed ov sie eie nee bead Me wah ie cae da 2 6 Lockout Prevention 0000 e eee ee sess 2 7 POWeEDOOE eerte tornei v ge E a ER eren 2 5 Rear Door Security 0 0 0 cee eee ee eee ee 2 7 gna TEE 2 22 Locks and Lighting Choices 0000 2 12 Low Coolant Warning Light s usus 2 80 Low Oil Level Light 0 00 2000005 2 79 Low Trac Light 00 005 2 74 2 87 2 91 Lubricants and Fluids 0 0 00 eee ee eee 7 20 Lubrication Service Body 0 00005 7 15 Maintenance Normal Replacement Parts 6 68 Maintenance Record 0 0 cece eee eee 7 22 Maintenance Schedule 00 00 cece eee 7 1 Owner Checks and Services 0 0 2000s 7 14 Periodic Maintenance Inspections 7 18 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 20 Scheduled Maintenance Services 7 4 Maintenance Underbody 00005 6 57 Maintenance When Trailer Towing 4 40 yellow blue Malfunction Indicator Lamp 0 2 75 Manual Control Climate Control System 3 6 Front Sat eee EL eerte unire deve 1 2 Lumbar erect enee eee E ERU ERI E 1 3 Methanol darte pce ow moe UR Ecce 6 5 Mirrors scit tor r eges Ro upse quide dede rm
141. epresent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 6 48 yellow blue Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at
142. er Audio System Glove Box Instrument Panel Fuse Block 2 67 yellow blue Instrument Panel Cluster SECURITY 40 79 iy 70 5 80 100 5o 80 909 7 w 90 end on oaoa 100 jr One O 10 0 3 260 RPM x1000 kmh MPH BRAKE amp o 160 TEMP APPLY BRAKE TO SHIFT FROM PARK United States Version Shown Others Similar The instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how the vehicle is running You ll know how fast you re going about how much fuel is in the tank and many other things you need to drive safely and economically 2 68 Speedometer Odometer The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven in either miles used in the United States or in kilometers used in Canada The vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer If you see silver lines between the numbers you ll know someone has probably tampered with it and the numbers may not be correct You may wonder what happens if the vehicle needs a new odometer installed If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer then that will be done If it can t then it will be set at zero and a label must be put on the driver s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed Trip Odometer The trip odometer tells how far you have driven since you last reset it To set it to zer
143. er Solvent USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Washer Solvent GM Part No 1051515 or equivalent Engine Oil Engine Oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid GM Gasoline Engines Starburst System o ue Rit ip inn lent symbol of the proper viscosity To EU determine the preferred viscosity Automatic DEXRON III Automatic for your vehicle s engine see Transaxle Transmission Fluid Engine Oi TIERS Index Multi Purpose Lubricant Engine Coolant 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable Superlube GM Part water and use only GM No 12346241 or equivalent Goodwrench DEX COOL or Havoline DEX COOL Coolant See Engine Coolant in the Index 7 20 yellow blue USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Supercharger Supercharger Oil GM Part Hood and Door Multi Purpose Lubricant No 12345982 See Supercharger Hinges Superlube GM Part Oil in the Index No 12346241 or equivalent Hood Latch Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol Weatherstrip Dielectric Silicone Grease GM Assembly GM Part No 12346293 or Conditioning Part No 12345579 or equivalent Secondary Latch equivalent or lubricant meeting Pivots Spring requirements of NLGI 2 Anchor and Category LB or GC LB Release Pawl 7 21 yellow blue Part E Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the Services or Periodic Maintenance can be added on date odometer reading an
144. er button 5 Add one peg at a time until your garage door opener operates with the compartment door closed when you press the button 2 60 yellow blue Sunglasses Storage Compartment The sunglasses storage compartment is the second compartment from the back on the overhead console To open the sunglasses storage compartment press the release latch forward and pull the compartment down to the full open position Accessory Power Outlet The accessory power outlet is located in front of the reading lamps in a small black door Push up on the bottom edge of this door to expose the accessory power outlet and a small storage compartment To open the armrest storage area pull up on the front edge of the latch The console has cassette and CD storage and a coinholder The center console also contains two cupholders To access the cupholders pull the cupholder door located just behind the console shift lever The two cupholders will pop up into an upright position Just below the center ashtray is an open storage compartment In front of this you may have a smaller compartment for storing smaller items yellow If you have a trunk access panel you will also have a pull down armrest that contains an open storage bin and two cupholders If the vehicle has rear seat armrests you will also have a trunk access panel To use the trunk access panel pull the rear armrest down unlock the access panel and pull it down
145. er in this section 1 53 yellow blue f NOTES yellow blue Y Section 2 Features and Controls Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle and information on starting shifting and braking Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly and what to do if you have a problem 2 2 Keys 2 43 2 4 Door Locks 2 44 2 8 Keyless Entry System If Equipped 2 45 2 12 Multifunction Alarm Locks and 2 46 Lighting Choices 2 51 2 22 Trunk 2 54 2 23 Theft 2 57 2 24 Content Theft Deterrent If Equipped 2 59 2 26 New Vehicle Break In 2 64 2 26 Ignition Positions 2 65 2 28 Starting Your Engine 2 66 2 30 Engine Coolant Heater If Equipped 2 32 Automatic Transaxle Operation 2 70 2 36 Parking Brake 2 82 2 37 Shifting Into PARK P 2 86 2 40 Shifting Out of PARK P 2 43 Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust Running Your Engine While You re Parked Power Windows Turn Signal Multifunction Lever Exterior Lamps Interior Lamps Mirrors Storage Compartments OnStar System Option Sunroof If Equipped The Instrument Panel Your Information System Warning Lights Gages and Indicators Head Up Display Option Driver Information Center DIC If Equipped yellow blue Keys Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons A child or others could be badly injured or
146. er than you actually are Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you re ready Try to be well rested If you must start when you re not fresh such as after a day s work don t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in Is your vehicle ready for a long trip If you keep it serviced and maintained it s ready to go If it needs service have it done before starting out Of course you ll find experienced and able service experts in Pontiac dealerships all across North America They ll be ready and willing to help if you need it 4 23 Here are some things you can check before a trip e Windshield Washer Fluid Is the reservoir full Are all windows clean inside and outside Wiper Blades Are they in good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids Have you checked all levels Lamps Are they all working Are the lenses clean Tires They are vitally important to a safe trouble free trip Is the tread good enough for long distance driving Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure Weather Forecasts What s the weather outlook along your route Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system Maps Do you have up to date maps 4 24 yellow blue Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel Call it highway hypnosi
147. erheated Engine Protection Operating Mode listed previously in this section You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away 5 11 yellow When you decide it s safe to lift the hood here s what you ll see 3800 and 3800 Supercharged Engine A Coolant Recovery Tank B Electric Engine Cooling Fans 3100 Engine C Radiator Pressure Cap A Coolant Recovery Tank B Electric Engine Cooling Fans C Radiator Pressure Cap An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling don t do anything else until it cools down yellow blue The coolant level should be at or above the COLD mark on the coolant recovery tank If it isn t you may have a leak in the radiator hoses heater hoses radiator water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Don t touch them If you do you can be burned Don t run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle 5 13 NOTICE Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn t covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operat
148. eric gal cate tla Seco ER ere etim 2 51 Bulb Replacement 00 0 000000 6 36 High Low Beam Changer sssse 2 47 Wiring oie an ae ane uei ee e uideo e Se 6 60 Head Up Display eeseeeeeee eese 2 82 Head Up Display Care of 0 00005 2 84 Hearing Impaired Customer Assistance 8 5 Heated Seat ode osetia pice peer ens 1 4 Heating eis spect Rr EE grated PEIPER REY PII 3 8 High Beam Headlamps 02 0 200 eeee 2 47 Highway Hypnosis 000 e eee ee eee eee 4 24 Hill and Mountain Roads 0 00005 4 25 Hitch s Trailer 4 2 kt RR bey hr d eem 4 37 Hood Checking Things Under sesseesesss 6 8 Release oo cco coe dw othe ddan doe eee he 6 9 Horn Full Floating 0 0 0 0 000000 2 45 PUDE rises dete Reto r ayerasd eb tenes a Neate 2 82 Hydroplaning epe Ree ERREUR 4 20 Ignition POsitiOnS i hv ede ERES ERAT 2 26 Ignition Transaxle Lock Check ue 7 17 Illuminated Entry 00 0 0 cee eee eee 2 54 Inflation Tire cisci sk on Rem 9E RE SY 6 44 Inside Day Night Rearview Mirror 2 57 Instrument Panel 0 00 c cece eee ees 2 66 Brightness Control 0 0 0 0 eese 2 54 unc ane a eons 6 53 Cluster ccc rm 2 68 Puse Block 5 22 ve Rr ARERO E LO RES ER 6 61 Interior Lamps 0 0 0 ec cece eA 2 54 Inspections Brake System 4 2 oreet e RR mme 7 19
149. ering wheel and pull the lever located on the left hand side of the steering column below the turn signal multifunction lever Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level then release the lever to lock the wheel in place 2 46 yellow blue Turn Signal Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes your Turn and Lane Change Signals Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Flash to Pass Feature Windshield Wipers Windshield Washer Cruise Control If Equipped Turn and Lane Change Signals The turn signal has two upward for right and two downward for left positions These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change To signal a turn move the lever all the way up or down When the turn is finished the lever will return automatically An arrow on the instrument panel will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change To signal a lane change just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash Hold it there until you complete your lane change The lever will return by itself when you release it As you signal a turn or a lane change if the arrow flashes faster than normal a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won t see your turn signal yellow blue If a bulb is burned out replace it to help avoid an accident If the arrows don t go on at all when you signal a turn check for burned out bulbs and then check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit B
150. erly Have your vehicle serviced right away The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem yellow blue Charging System Light The charging system light will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition as a check to show you it s working Then it will go out If it stays on or comes on while you are driving you may have a problem with the charging system It could indicate that you have a loose drive belt or another electrical problem Have it checked right away Driving while this light is on could drain your battery If you must drive a short distance with the light on be certain to turn off all your accessories such as the radio and air conditioner 2 71 Brake System Warning Light Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part isn t working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the warning light comes on there is a brake problem Have your brake system inspected right away This light should come on when you turn the key to START If it doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there s a problem BRAKE CUP If the light comes on while you are driving pull off the road and stop carefully You may notice that the pedal
151. errent system the power lock switch may cause the system to arm see Content Theft Deterrent in the Index for more details To unlock any door from outside the vehicle with your key insert it fully into the key cylinder and turn it counterclockwise This will unlock only the door you are operating Last Door Closed Locking The Last Door Closed Locking feature makes it more convenient for you to use your power door locks to lock all the doors when leaving your vehicle When any door is open the first time you attempt to lock the doors using the power door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped this will result in three chimes to signal that the Last Door Closed Locking feature is being used All doors can be opened for any reason for five seconds from the time the last door has been closed Five seconds after the last door is closed all doors will lock You can lock the doors immediately by using the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped The Last Door Closed Locking feature will not occur and doors will not be locked as a result of this feature when the ignition is in RUN or ACCESSORY The Last Door Closed Locking feature is enabled from the factory To turn the Last Door Closed Locking feature on or off see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index yellow blue Automatic Door Locks All of the doors will lock automatically when you move your shift lever out
152. es adjust for wear Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality GM brake parts When you replace parts of your braking system for example when your brake linings wear down and you have to have new ones put in be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts If you don t your brakes may no longer work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle the balance between your front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance you ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts Battery Your new vehicle comes with an ACDelco Freedom battery When it s time for a new battery we recommend an ACDelco Freedom battery Get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label If your battery has a very low charge or is dead you may not be able to remove the ignition key from the ignition switch or shift out of PARK P Refer to Shifting Out of Park P in the Index yellow blue Vehicle Storage If you re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more remove the black negative cable from the battery This will help keep your battery from running down Batteries have acid that can b
153. even killed They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move Don t leave the keys in a vehicle with children The master key can be used for the ignition as well as all door locks and storage compartments The valet key can be used for the ignition and the two side doors only It will not open the trunk glove box or fold down rear seat trunk access panel if equipped yellow blue When a new vehicle is delivered it will come with a bar coded tag attached to the key ring This tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys Keep the code in a safe place If you lose your keys you ll be able to have new ones made easily using this code If you need a new ignition key contact your dealer who can obtain the correct key code Remember to carry the pre cut emergency key which Pontiac sends after delivery This service is not available in Canada In an emergency call Pontiac Roadside Assistance at 1 800 ROADSIDE 1 800 762 3743 In Canada call 1 800 268 6800 NOTICE Your vehicle has a number of features that can help prevent theft But you can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys inside You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in So be sure you have extra keys Door Locks Unlocked doors can be dangerous Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out
154. ewhat lower BAC level yellow blue There is a gender difference too Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men Since alcohol is carried in body water this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks The law in many U S states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0 10 percent In a growing number of U S states and throughout Canada the limit is 0 08 percent In some other countries it s even lower The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0 04 percent The BAC will be over 0 10 percent after three to six drinks in one hour Of course as we ve seen it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks and how quickly the person drinks them But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0 10 percent Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0 05 percent and that the effects are worse at night All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0 05 percent Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0 05 percent or above A driver with a BAC level of 0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision At a BAC level of 0 10 percent the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater at a level of 0 15 percent the chance is 25 times greater Th
155. ey really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on your right Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Storage Compartments Glove Box Use the master key to lock and unlock the glove box To open lift the right side of the latch Overhead Console Option The optional overhead console has reading lamps storage compartments including one for your garage door opener and one for sunglasses and an accessory power outlet These features are explained on the following pages yellow blue Reading Lamps To turn either reading lamp on or off press the switch next to it Garage Door Opener You can store your garage door opener in the rear compartment of the overhead console and operate it from this position To install your garage door opener follow these instructions 1 Open the compartment by pressing the latch forward Remove the piece of self sticking Velcro 2 Peel the protective backing from the Velcro and press it firmly to the back of your garage door opener 3 Be sure that the button on your garage door opener is centered above the area with raised lines on the compartment door Make sure the button is facing down and press the opener firmly into place 2 59 4 Once the opener is installed remove the peg B from the compartment Install the peg onto the feature A on the door that is aligned with your garage door open
156. formation about the readiness of the system when the sensors are activated and driver s safety belt usage at deployment Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag system Improper service can mean that your air bag system won t work properly See your dealer for service 1 27 NOTICE If you damage the covering for the driver s or the right front passenger s air bag the bag may not work properly You may have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel or both the air bag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger s air bag Do not open or break the air bag coverings Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the air bag system in several places around your vehicle You don t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle Your dealer and the Grand Prix Service Manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system To purchase a service manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Index 1 28 For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected an air bag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors They are probably part of the air bag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for yo
157. forward m uw Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts can t do their job when you re reclined like this CAUTION Continued 1 5 The shoulder belt can t do its job because it won t be against your body Instead it will be in front of you In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt can t do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly 1 6 yellow blue Head Restraints Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash Seatback Latches 2 Door Models On two door models the right front seat is designed to make it easy to get in and out of the rear seat Tilt the right seatback fully forward The whole seat will now slide forward If the seat will not tilt lift the seatback latch located on the back of the seat to tilt the seatback forward The whole seat will now slide forward After someone gets into the rear seat area move the right front seatback to its original position Then move the seat rearward until i
158. ganized 7 18 Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections 7 3 Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services 7 20 Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 5 Scheduled Maintenance 7 22 Part E Maintenance Record IMPORTANT KEEP ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDED Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer for details yellow blue Introduction Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance procedures are important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle To help protect our environment and to keep your vehicle in good condition please maintain your vehicle properly How This Section is Organized This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services shows what to have done and how often Some of these services can be complex so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment you should let your dealer s service department or another qualified service center do these jobs Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be serio
159. ge reads F FULL Ittakes a more or less fuel to fill up than the gage reads For example the gage reads half full but it took a more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill it The gage pointer may move while cornering braking or speeding up The gage may not indicate E EMPTY when the ignition is turned off yellow blue Low Fuel Light If your fuel is low the warning light near the fuel gage will go on LOW FUEL It will also come on for a few seconds when you first turn on the ignition as a check to show you it s working If it doesn t come on then see your dealer 2 81 Head Up Display Option If the HUD image is too bright or too high in your field of view it may take you more time to see things you need to see when it s dark outside Be sure to keep the HUD image dim and placed low in your field of view 2 82 If you have the Head Up Display HUD you can see the speedometer reading in English or metric units and a brief display of the current radio station or CD track displayed through the windshield yellow blue The HUD also shows these lights when they are lit on the instrument panel Turn Signal Indicators High Beam Indicator Symbol Low Fuel Symbol The HUD will display CHECK GAGE when the following items are lit on the instrument panel Oil Warning Symbol Coolant Temperature Symbol Charging System Symbol When you sit str
160. ght front passenger s bag will be hot for a short time The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There will be some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated air bags Air bag inflation doesn t prevent the driver from seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle When an air bag inflates there is dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but can t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or door yellow blue In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger air bag Air bags are designed to inflate only once After they inflate you ll need some new parts for your air bag system If you don t get them the air bag system won t be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include air bag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information about the air bag system The module records in
161. gine Exhaust in the Index Engine Cooling System Inspection Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace as needed Clean the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at least once a year Throttle System Inspection Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding and for damaged or missing parts Replace parts as needed Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables yellow blue Brake System Inspection Inspect the complete system Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc Check parking brake adjustment You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking 7 19 yellow blue Part D Recommended Fluids USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT and Lubricants Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid NOTE Fluids and lubricants identified below by name System GM Part No 12377967 or part number or specification may be obtained from equivalent DOT 3 Brake Fluid your dealer Windshield GM Optikleen Wash
162. gins playing CD will appear in the bottom left corner and a disc and track number will be displayed The disc numbers are listed on the front of the magazine Compact Disc Errors If E and a number appear on the display an error has occurred and the compact disc temporarily cannot play The CD changer will send an error message to the receiver to indicate E30 Disc Label Side Up E34 CD Changer Door Open If the error occurred while trying to play a CD in the compact disc player or changer the following conditions may have caused the error The road is too rough The disc should play when the road is smoother The disc is dirty scratched or wet The disc is label side up If so load the disc label side down The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again The CD changer door is open Completely close the door to restore normal operation An empty magazine is inserted in the CD changer Try the magazine again with a disc loaded on one of the trays If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected please contact your dealer If your radio displays an error number write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem yellow blue Playing a Compact Disc PREV 1 Press this button to go back to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played Press PREV again to go to the previous track on the disc NEXT 2 Press t
163. have a problem Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off yellow blue Press the switch on top of the steering column to make your front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in and even if the key isn t in To turn off the flashers press the switch again When the hazard warning flashers are on your turn signals and brake lamps won t work Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet 100 m behind your vehicle Jump Starting If your battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle But please follow the steps listed to do it safely Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you If you don t follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you yellow blue NOTICE Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn t be covered by your warranty The ACDelco Freedom battery in your vehicle has a built in hydrometer Do not charge test or jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear or light yellow Replace the battery when there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a cranking complain
164. have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly 4 13 Off Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you re driving OFF ROAD RECOVERY edge of paved surface If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway 4 14 yellow blue Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two lane highway waits for just the right moment accelerates moves around the vehicle ahead then goes back into the right lane again A simple maneuver Not necessarily Passing another vehicle on a two lane highway is a potentially dangerous move since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds A miscalculation an error in judgment or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents the head
165. he battery out of the transmitter Do not use metal flanges to pop out the battery 3 Putthe new battery into the transmitter as shown on the transmitter Use a type CR2032 battery or equivalent type 4 Reassemble the transmitter Make sure the halves are snapped together tightly so water will not get in yellow blue 5 Check the transmitter operation If needed follow the instructions on resynchronization Resynchronization Your remote keyless entry system uses a continually changing code for increased security Normally the receiver in your vehicle will keep track of this changing code Loss of synchronization will occur if the transmitter is activated more than 256 times while out of range of the vehicle Loss of synchronization will occur after battery replacement if the transmitter is immediately activated more than 16 times while out of range of the vehicle If your remote keyless entry transmitter has stopped working you may need to resynchronize the transmitter to the vehicle receiver To do this press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons together and hold for at least seven seconds or until the horn sounds when equipped with Content Theft Deterrent If attempts to resynchronize your transmitter to the vehicle are not successful you may need to have your dealer match the transmitter to the vehicle See Matching Transmitter s To Your Vehicle in the Index 2 11 Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting C
166. he chance of personal injury This is because the back of the rear facing child The instructions that come with the infant or child restraint would be very close to the inflating air restraint will show you how to do that Both the owner s bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint manual and the child restraint instructions are important in a rear seat so if either one of these is not available obtain a You may secure a forward facing child restraint replacement copy from the manufacturer in the right front seat but before you do always Where to Put the Restraint move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It s better to secure the child restraint in Accident statistics show that children are safer if they aviar sent are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat We at General Motors therefore recommend that you put your child restraint in the rear seat Never put a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger seat Here s why 1 42 yellow blue Top Strap A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the right front passenger air bag if it inflates even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat It s always better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat You may secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat but before you do always move the fron
167. he ignition switch is located on the right side of the steering column With the ignition key in the ignition switch you can turn the switch to five positions ACCESSORY A This position lets you use things like the radio and windshield wipers when the engine is off To use ACCESSORY push in the key and turn it toward you The steering wheel will stay locked LOCK B Before you put the key into the ignition switch the switch is in LOCK It s also the only position from which you can remove the key This position locks the ignition steering wheel and transaxle It s a theft deterrent feature OFF C This position lets you turn off the engine but still turn the steering wheel It doesn t lock the steering wheel like LOCK Use OFF if you must have the vehicle pushed or towed yellow blue RUN D This position is where the key returns after you start the vehicle With the engine off you can use RUN to display some of the warning and indicator lights START E This position starts the engine A warning chime will sound if you open the driver s door when the ignition is in OFF LOCK or ACCESSORY and the key is in the ignition NOTICE If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can t turn it be sure you are using the correct key if so is it all the way in If it is then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard But turn the key only with your hand Using a tool to force it could break the key
168. he leather yellow blue Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions Cleaning Interior Plastic Components Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish 6 53 Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry Do not bleach or dye safety belts If you do it may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water Cleaning Glass Surfaces Glass should be cleaned often GM Glass Cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index 6 54 yellow blue Don t use abrasive cleaners on glass because they may cause scratches Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window since they may have to be scraped off later If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window an electric defogger element may be damaged Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
169. he transaxle in PARK P and all doors will unlock automatically Automatic Door Locking Shift out of PARK P with the ignition on and the driver s door closed and all doors will lock automatically Mode 4 Automatic Unlocking and Locking with Transaxle in PARK P Automatic Door Unlocking Shift into PARK P with the ignition on and all doors will unlock automatically Automatic Door Locking Shift out of PARK P with the ignition on and the driver s door closed and all doors will lock automatically Your vehicle comes with this feature set in mode 3 To change the mode do the following 1 Follow the instructions for Entering Programming Mode listed previously 2 Press LOCK on the power door lock switch 3 Count the number of chimes you hear The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for You change the mode by pressing LOCK on the power door lock switch again 4 yellow blue Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions earlier in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle Last Door Closed Locking and Lockout Prevention With the Last Door Closed Locking and Lockout Prevention features your vehicle will do the following If you leave your key in the ignition and leave the driver s door open you won t be a
170. hen have it fixed so it will be there to tell you when the Traction Control System or Enhanced Traction System is active Malfunction Indicator Lamp Service Engine Soon Light Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the ENGINE SOON fuel ignition and emission control systems SERVICE This system is called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction yellow blue NOTICE If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on after a while your emission controls may not work as well your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty NOTICE Modifications made to the engine transaxle exhaust or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect your vehicle s emission controls and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON lig
171. hen to replace the air filter See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it stops flame if the engine backfires If it isn t there and the engine backfires you could be burned Don t drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off NOTICE If the air cleaner filter is off a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire And dirt can easily get into your engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner filter in place when you re driving Supercharger Oil Unless you are technically qualified and have the proper tools you should let your dealer or a qualified service center perform this maintenance When to Check Check oil level every 30 000 miles 50 000 km or every 36 months whichever occurs first What Kind of Oil to Use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index and use only the recommended oil yellow blue How to Check and Add Oil Check oil only when the engine is cold Allow the engine to cool two to three hours after running If you remove the supercharger oil fill plug while the engine is hot pressure may cause hot oil to blow out of the oil fill hole You may be burned Do not remove the plug until the engine cools 1 Clean the area around the oil fill plug before removing it 2 Remove the oil fi
172. her is located on the thermostat bypass tube 3800 V6 engine There is one bleed valve It is located on the thermostat housing yellow blue Fill the radiator with the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture up to the base of the filler neck See Engine Coolant in the Index for more information about the proper coolant mixture If you see a stream of coolant coming from an air bleed valve close the valve Otherwise close the valves after the radiator is filled Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine and the compartment M 58 19 yellow 7 If you have the 3800 V6 engine replace the 8 Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL mark 3800 Series I Vo engme cover shield 9 Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank but A Remove the oil fill tube with cap attached from leave the radiator pressure cap off the valve cover B Insert the catch tab on the cover shield under the bracket on the engine C Place the hole in the cover shield over the hole in the valve cover Install oil fill tube and cap by twisting clockwise D If you have the supercharged engine install the nut in the center of the cover shield 10 Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the engine cooling fans 11 By this time the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower If the level i is lower add more of the proper DEX COOL coolant m
173. hicle cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when this feature is in use If you want to open a rear door when the security lock is on unlock the door from the inside and then open the door from the outside Lockout Prevention The Lockout Deterrent feature makes it difficult for you to lock your keys in your vehicle If the driver s door is open while the keys are in the ignition you will not be able to use your power door lock switch This feature cannot guarantee that you ll never be locked out of your vehicle If you don t leave the keys in the ignition or if you use the manual door lock you could still lock your keys inside your vehicle Always remember to take your keys with you To turn this feature on or off see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index Leaving Your Vehicle If you are leaving the vehicle take your keys open your door and set the locks from inside Then get out and close the door Keyless Entry System If Equipped If your vehicle is equipped you can lock and unlock your doors or unlock your trunk from about 3 feet 1 m up to 30 feet 9 m away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle 3 Button Key Fob 4 Button Key Fob yellow blue Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the followi
174. hild restraint in the center front seat It s always better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat You may secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat but before you do always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one yellow blue 1 Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is plate and pulling it along the belt positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 2 Putthe restraint on the seat 5 To tighten the belt pull its free end while you push down on the child restraint If you re using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 6 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure 3 Run the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 1 47 To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt It will be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Y 7 Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag Never put a rear facing child restraint in this s
175. his button to advance to the next track on the disc PROG 3 Press this button to select the next disc in the magazine If a CD cannot be played its number will be skipped when selecting discs while using the PROG button RANDOM 4 Press this button to enter the random play mode RDM will appear on the display While in this mode the tracks on the discs will be played in random order If you press PROG or SEEK while in the random mode discs and tracks will be scanned randomly Press this button again to turn off the random feature and return to normal operation REV 5 Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track As the CD reverses elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage 3 21 FWD 6 Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track As the CD advances elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage RECALL Press this button to see what track is currently playing Press RECALL again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing When a new track starts to play the track number will also appear Press RECALL a third time and the time of day will be displayed SEEK Press the SEEK down arrow while playing a CD to go back to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played If you press it again the changer will go to previous tracks Press the SEEK up arrow and it will go to the next higher track on the dis
176. his button to remove the tape The radio will play EJECT may be activated with either the ignition or radio off Cassettes may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first CLN If this message appears on the display the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index After you clean the player press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset CD Adapter Kits Itis possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player To activate the bypass feature use the following steps 1 Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press and hold the TAPE PLAY button for three seconds The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds indicating the feature is active 4 Insert the adapter It will power up the radio and begin playing This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed 3 13 AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player If Equipped Playing the Radio POWER VOL Push this knob to turn the system on and off To increase volume turn the knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume RECALL Display the time with the ignition off by press
177. hoices yellow blue Your vehicle s locks and lighting systems can be programmed with several different features The features you can program depend on the options that came with your vehicle The following chart shows the features that can be programmed To determine which features your vehicle is equipped with follow the steps listed for entering the programming mode Feature Number Delayed Automatic Last Door Remote Remote Content Content of Chimes Illumina Door Locks Closed Drivers Lock Theft Theft Sounded tion Locking Door Unlock Arming Exit Lockout Unlock Confirma Disarming Lighting Deterrent X X 2 12 Entering Programming Mode To program features your vehicle must be in this programming mode Follow these steps 1 Tum the ignition key to LOCK or OFF 2 Remove the MALL PGM fuse from the instrument panel fuse block See Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index 3 Tum the ignition key to ACCESSORY 4 Count the number of chimes you hear You will hear two to four chimes depending on vehicle features Refer to the chart shown previously for available programming choices You can now program your choices After programming a feature you can exit the programming mode at anytime Exiting Programming Mode To exit programming mode turn the key from ACCESSORY to OFF and put the MALL PGM fuse back into the instrument panel fuse block yellow blue Delayed Illumina
178. ht to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test 2 75 This light should come on as a check to show you it is working when the ignition is on and the engine is not running If the light doesn t come on have it repaired This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways e Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required e Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required 2 76 yellow blue If the Light Is Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle Reducing vehicle speed Avoiding hard accelerations Avoiding steep uphill grades e If you are towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light stops flashing and remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park your vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light remains on ste
179. hydraulic system If you have too much brake fluid it can spill on the engine The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and your vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system When your brake fluid falls to a low level your brake warning light will come on See Brake System Warning Light in the Index What to Add When you do need brake fluid use only DOT 3 brake fluid Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Maintenance Schedule Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system your brakes may not work well or they may not even work at all This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid yellow blue NOTICE Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they ll have to be replaced Don t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Appearance Care in the Index
180. i secos er er ie hs ees vedio eae ds 1 7 NODI CPI EP rac 1 13 Care nesenai RR GU E UE RO RP e AUR AMI e 6 54 Center Passenger Position 05 1 29 Children 2 3 oae aA a Sob iere Mee eee 1 35 Driver Position lue canoe pere la Rx Rod ed 1 13 Extender Re Rb RE RIX ek ERR OS 1 53 How to Wear Properly 2 000 000 0005 1 13 Incorrect Usage 004 1 17 1 51 1 52 Lap Belt s et Re e eee ees eem 1 29 Lap Shoulder 000000000 1 13 1 30 Larger Children 2er ree reet etes 1 50 Questions and Answers 0 00 cece eens 1 12 Rear Comfort Guides 00 0 000005 1 33 Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions 1 30 Rear Seat Passengers 00 00 0000 00s 1 30 Reminder Light 000 1 9 2 63 Replacing After a Crash 0 0 005 1 53 Right Front Passenger Position 1 22 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 1 16 Smaller Children and Babies 1 35 Use During Pregnancy 0 0000005 1 21 Warning Light 000000005 1 8 2 70 Why They Work 0 00 0 e ee eee eee 1 9 Safety Chains 00 cee eee eee eee eee ee 4 37 Safety Defects Reporting 0 00 8 12 Safety Warnings and Symbols 04 iii Scheduled Maintenance 0 0 0 00000 7 5 Seatback Latches 4 2 die er ERES ER 1 6 Seatback Reclining
181. icle or exhaust system had been modified improperly If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO and Have your vehicle fixed immediately 2 43 Running Your Engine While You re Parked It s better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle see the earlier Caution under Engine Exhaust Also idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide CO into your vehicle even if the fan switch is at the highest setting One place this can happen is a garage Exhaust with CO can come in easily NEVER park in a garage with the engine running Another closed in place can be a blizzard See Blizzard in the Index 2 44 yellow blue It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you ve left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won t move See Shifting Into PARK P
182. ier in this section To turn the Exit Lighting feature off or on see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index 2 55 Front Reading Lamps If the vehicle has the optional sunroof you will have reading lamps in front of the sunroof switch Press the button behind each reading lamp to turn them on and off Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps There is a reading lamp provided in each rear assist handle Use the button next to each lamp to turn it on and off Roof Console Reading Lamps These lamps are part of the roof console They will go on when you open the doors When the doors are closed push the button next to each lamp to turn them on and off The console also contains an open storage bin 2 56 yellow blue Battery Saver The vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from draining the battery in case you accidentally leave the interior trunk or underhood lamps on If you leave any of these lamps on while the ignition is in LOCK or OFF they will automatically turn off after 10 minutes The lamps won t come back on again until you do one of the following Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY Turn the interior lamp dial completely clockwise then back slightly counterclockwise Open or close and reopen a door that is closed If the vehicle has less than 15 miles 25 km on the odometer the battery saver will turn off the lamps after only three minutes Mirrors Adjust all the mirrors so you
183. ier in this section Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guides squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out from the guides Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip and then slide the guide onto the clip Rotate the guide and clip inward and in between the seatback and the interior body leaving only the loop of elastic cord exposed yellow blue Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle Smaller Children and Babies Children who are up against or very close to any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed This is true even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle 1 35 Smaller children and babies should always be restrained in a child or inf
184. iler lamps from time to time to be sure they re all working Once you disconnect the trailer lamps the bulb warning lights again can tell you if one of your vehicle lamps is out yellow blue Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you don t shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well On a long uphill grade shift down and reduce your speed to around 45 mph 70 km h to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating If you have overdrive you may want to drive in THIRD 3 instead of DRIVE D Parking on Hills You really should not park your vehicle with a trailer attached on a hill If something goes wrong your rig could start to move People can be injured and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged 4 39 But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill here s how to do it 1 Apply your regular brakes but don t shift into PARK P yet 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the regular brakes Then apply your parking brake and then shift to PARK P 5 Release the regular brakes When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you Start your engine
185. ime Mall Module Cluster Trip Computer Head Up Display Brake Transaxle Shift Interlock Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Air Bag Turn Signal PRNDL Brake Transaxle Shift Interlock Blower Control HVAC Fuse DIC HVAC PWR DROP CANISTER VENT DRL Description Rear Defog HVAC Driver Information Center Daytime Running Lamps Heated Seats Power Drop Ignition Canister Vent Solenoid Daytime Running Lamps Underhood Electrical Center Passenger s Side yellow blue ue Some fuses are in a fuse block on the passenger s side of the engine compartment Pull off the cover labeled FUSES to expose the fuses 6 63 yellow blue Fuse Description CE oo 8 Ignition Main 2 E B Er 18 Fuel Injections 3 2T 28 19 Spare fT p mo EX ol O 20 Spare 6 14 40 7 21 Mass Air Flow MAF Heated 7 2 ee Sensors Canister Purge Boost 8 E CE m Solenoid 22 Spare 23 Spare 24 Spare Fuse Description 25 Ignition Module 1 Cooling Fan 2 26 Spare 2 Spare 27 Trunk Release Back Up Lamps 3 Headlamps 28 AC Clutch ABS Ignition 4 Battery Main 2 29 Radio Remote Keyless Entry 5 Ignition Main 1 Theft Deterrent Shock Sensor Trip Computer HVAC Module 6 Cooling Fan 1 Anti Lock Brake System Module 7 Battery Main 1 Security LED 6 64 Fuse
186. ims become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence While we hope you never have the occasion to use our service it is added security while traveling for you and your family Remember we re only a phone call away Pontiac Roadside Assistance 1 800 ROADSIDE or 1 800 762 3743 Canadian Roadside Assistance Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States Please refer to the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call 1 800 268 6800 for emergency services Courtesy Transportation Pontiac has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealerships are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for new vehicles The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase lease customers in conjunction with the Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs Plan Ahead When Possible When your vehicle requires warranty service you should contact your dealer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience If it is determined tha
187. ing Mode in the Index NOTICE When adding coolant it is important that you use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL is not covered by your new vehicle warranty If there seems to be no leak with the engine on check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running If the engine is overheating both fans should be running If they aren t your vehicle needs service 5 14 yellow blue How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank If you haven t found a problem yet but the coolant level isn t at the COLD mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank See Engine Coolant in the Index for more information Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid like alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean dr
188. ing Washer Fluid Don t mix water with ready to use washer fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water doesn t clean as well as washer fluid Fill your washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it s very cold This allows for expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full Don t use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage your washer system and paint 6 31 Brakes Brake Fluid Your brake master cylinder reservoir is on the driver s side of the engine compartment It is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear When new linings are put in the fluid level goes back up The other reason is that fluid is leaking out 6 32 yellow blue of the brake system If it is you should have your brake system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won t work well or won t work at all So it isn t a good idea to top off your brake fluid Adding brake fluid won t correct a leak If you add fluid when your linings are worn then you ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings You should add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake
189. ing this knob When the radio is playing press this knob to recall the station frequency 3 14 yellow blue Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display shows your selection TUNE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to choose radio stations Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it SEEK Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there PUSHBUTTONS The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 Just Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select the band 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until SET appears on the display Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return 5 Repeatthe steps for each pushbutton Setting the Tone BASS Slide the lever to the right or left to increase or decrease bass TREBLE Slide the lever to the right or left to increase or decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Adjusting the Speakers BAL Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to move the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle
190. inkable water and DEX COOL coolant NOTICE In cold weather water can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture yellow blue You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the COLD mark start your vehicle If the overheat warning continues there s one more thing you can try You can add the proper coolant mixture directly to the radiator but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it 5 15 yellow blue Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the radiator pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap How to Add Coolant to the Radiator NOTICE Your engine has a specific radiator fill procedure Failure to follow this procedure could cause your engine to overheat and be severely damaged 5 16 HE C SO inn P unen fa 1 You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the 2 Then keep turning the pressure cap but now
191. inking For persons under 21 it s against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws yellow blue The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive But what if people do How much is too much if the driver plans to drive It s a lot less than many might think Although it depends on each person and situation here is some general information on the problem The Blood Alcohol Concentration BAC of someone who is drinking depends upon four things The amount of alcohol consumed The drinker s body weight The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol According to the American Medical Association a 180 1b 82 kg person who drinks three 12 ounce 355 ml bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0 06 percent The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce 120 ml glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounces 45 ml of a liquor like whiskey gin or vodka It s the amount of alcohol that counts For example if the same person drank three double martinis 3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each within an hour the person s BAC would be close to 0 12 percent A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a som
192. ition key in your hand the vehicle is in PARK P Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Don t leave your vehicle with the engine running unless you have to yellow blue If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running be sure the vehicle is in PARK P and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you ve moved the shift lever into PARK P position hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK P without first pulling it toward you or if you have a console shift lever without first pushing the button If you can it means that the shift lever wasn t fully locked into PARK P Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you don t shift your transaxle into PARK P properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transaxle You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK P This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into PARK P properly before you leave the driver s seat To find out how see Shifting Into PARK P in the Index When
193. ixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck 12 Then replace the pressure cap At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck reinstall the pressure cap Be sure the arrows on the pressure cap line up like this 13 Check the coolant in the recovery tank The level in the coolant recovery tank should be at the HOT mark when the engine is hot or at the COLD mark when the engine is cold yellow blue If a Tire Goes Flat It s unusual for a tire to blow out while you re driving especially if you maintain your tires properly If air goes out of a tire it s much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you d use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible If a tire goes flat
194. k functions using the buttons on your steering wheel yellow blue VOLUME Press the up or down arrow to increase or decrease volume PLAY Press this button to play a cassette tape or compact disc when the radio is playing MUTE Press this button to silence the system Press it again or any other radio button to turn on the sound SEEK Press the up arrow to tune to the next radio station and the down arrow to tune to the previous radio station If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing the player will advance to the next selection with the up arrow and go to the previous selection with the down arrow PRESET Press this button to play a station you have programmed on the radio preset buttons When a cassette tape is playing press this button to change tape sides If you have the trunk mounted CD changer press this button to advance to the next disc in the magazine AM FM Press this button to choose AM FM1 or FM2 If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing it will stop and the radio will play 3 25 Understanding Radio Reception AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range however can cause stations to interfere with each other AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it FM Stereo FM stereo will give you the best sound but FM signals will reach only about 10 to
195. kwise to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and counterclockwise to decrease the brightness Turn the control completely counterclockwise to turn them off 2 54 yellow blue Courtesy Lamps When any door is opened several lamps come on These lamps are courtesy lamps They make it easy for you to enter and leave the vehicle at night You can also turn these lamps on by turning the interior lamps dial completely clockwise Illuminated Entry The Illuminated Entry feature will illuminate the interior so that you can see the inside of the vehicle before you enter at night The interior lamps will come on for 40 seconds when you unlock the doors using the remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped and the ignition is in LOCK or OFF After 40 seconds have elapsed the interior lamps will slowly fade out The lamps will fade out before 40 seconds have elapsed if you Lock all doors using the remote keyless entry transmitter Lock the doors using the power door lock switch When any door is opened illuminated entry is canceled The interior lamps will stay on while any door is opened and slowly fade out when all doors are closed The interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds after all doors have been closed if they have not been locked See Delayed Illumination later in this section Delayed Illumination The Delayed Illumination feature will continue to illuminate the interior for 25 seconds
196. l There are two ways to turn off the cruise control Step lightly on the brake pedal or Move the cruise switch to OFF Erasing Cruise Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition or shift into PARK P or NEUTRAL N the cruise control set speed memory is erased Exterior Lamps The lamp controls are located on the lower left side of the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel They control these systems Headlamps Taillamps Parking Lamps License Lamps Sidemarker Lamps Instrument Panel Lights Courtesy Lamps Fog Lamps 2 51 E D Turn the knob to this symbol to turn on the headlamps and other operating lamps PS Turn the knob to this symbol to turn on the parking and other operating lamps without the headlamps Turn the knob to OFF to turn off the lamps yellow blue Daytime Running Lamps Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the DRL work so be sure it isn t covered The DRL system will make your low beam headlamps come on at a reduced brightness when the ignition is on the headlamp switch is off and the parking brake is released When the DRL are on only your low beam headlamps wil
197. l Service See footnote bo Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Replace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnote T Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 10 Scheduled Maintenance 82 500 Miles 137 500 km Check Oil Life Monitor If engine oil and filter are changed reset monitor See Engine Oil in the Index An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Check Oil Life Monitor If engine oil and filter are changed reset monitor See Engine Oil in the Index An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Inspect fuel tank cap and lines for damage or leaks Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage Replace parts as needed An Emission Control Service See footnoteT For supercharged engines only Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as needed or every 36 months whichever occurs first See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in this section An Emission Control Service See footnoteT Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation patte
198. l be on The taillamps sidemarker and other lamps won t be on Your instrument panel won t be lit up either 432 eOeOeOOeeeoemE When it s dark enough outside your headlamps will change to full brightness The other lamps that come on with your headlamps will also come on When it s bright enough outside the regular lamps will go out and your low beam headlamps change to the reduced brightness of DRL To idle your vehicle with the DRL off set the parking brake while the ignition is in OFF or LOCK Then start your vehicle The DRL will stay off until you release the parking brake As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it yellow blue Fog Lamps The fog lamps switch is located in the upper hand corner of the instrument panel to the left of the instrument panel cluster To turn the fog lamps on press the right side of the fog lamps switch A light will glow on the switch to let you know that they are on The parking lamps must be on or the fog lamps won t come on Press the left hand side of the switch to turn the fog lamps off 2 53 The fog lamps will go off whenever you change to high beam headlamps When you return to low beams the fog lamps will come on again Interior Lamps Instrument Panel Intensity Control You can brighten or dim the instrument panel lights by turning the interior lamps dial Turn the dial cloc
199. ld restraint instructions will show you how If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or neck put it behind the child restraint 3 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to yellow blue 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock To tighten the belt feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint If you re using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure 1 45 To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Rear Seat Position 7 You ll be using the lap belt Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 46 yellow blue A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the right front passenger air bag if it inflates even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags Never secure a c
200. lease If Equipped Press the button behind the glove box door to unlock the trunk from inside the vehicle The shift lever must be in PARK P for the remote trunk release button to work Theft Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal However there are ways you can help Key in the Ignition If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside it s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves so don t do it When you park your vehicle and open the driver s door you ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you Always do this Your steering wheel will be locked and so will your ignition and transaxle And remember to lock the doors Parking at Night Park in a lighted spot close all windows and lock your vehicle Remember to keep your valuables out of sight Put them in a storage area or take them with you yellow blue Parking Lots If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle it s best to lock it up and take your keys But what if you have to leave your ignition key If possible park in a busy well lit area Put your valuables in a storage area like your trunk or glove box Be sure to close and lock the storage area Close all windows Lock the glove box Lock all doors except the driver s
201. lease all brakes Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect 7 17 Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Listed in this part are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year for instance each spring and fall You should let your dealer s service department or other qualified service center do these jobs Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a service manual See Service and Owner Publications in the Index Steering Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts signs of wear or lack of lubrication Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for damage tears or leakage Replace seals if necessary 7 18 yellow blue Exhaust System Inspection Inspect the complete exhaust system Inspect the body near the exhaust system Look for broken damaged missing or out of position parts as well as open seams holes loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle See En
202. lever is in PARK P and that the shift knob button is fully released 2 Locate the override access slot on the upper right hand side of the shift panel 3 Remove the override access slot cap 4 Insert a key or screwdriver into the access slot press in and hold 5 Press the shift knob button in and hold 6 Remove the key or screwdriver from the slot 7 Pull the shift lever into the desired gear position For vehicles with center console mounted gear shift 8 Replace the override access slot cap levers the second override access slot is located on the NOTE You will not be able to remove the key from the upper right hand side of the console shift panel ignition unless the shift lever is in the PARK P position with the shift knob button fully released 2 42 Parking Over Things That Burn Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite Don t park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn yellow blue Engine Exhaust Engine exhaust can kill It contains the gas carbon monoxide CO which you can t see or smell It can cause unconsciousness and death You might have exhaust coming in if Your exhaust system sounds strange or different Your vehicle gets rusty underneath Your vehicle was damaged in a collision Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris Repairs weren t done correctly Your veh
203. ll plug using a 3 16 inch Allen wrench 3 The oil level is correct when it just reaches the bottom of the threads of the inspection hole 4 Replace the oil plug with the O ring in place Torque to 88 Ib in 10 N m 6 21 Automatic Transaxle Fluid When to Check and Change A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid level is when the engine oil is changed Change both the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter at 100 000 miles 166 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index 6 22 yellow blue How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department If you do it yourself be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick NOTICE Too much or too little fluid can damage your transaxle Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transa
204. lot of heavy braking If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If your engine ever stops while you re driving brake normally but don t pump your brakes If you do the pedal may get harder to push down If your engine stops you will still have some power brake assist But you will use it when you brake Once the power assist is used up it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push yellow blue Anti Lock Brakes ABS Your vehicle has anti lock brakes ABS ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid When you start your engine or when you begin to drive away your anti lock brake system will check itself You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on and you may even notice that your brake pedal moves or pulses a little This is normal If there s a problem with the anti lock brake system this warning light will stay on See Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light in the Index yellow The anti lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions Here s how anti lock works Let s say the road is wet You re driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam
205. low AJAR This light alerts you that the trunk is not fully closed LOW TRAC This light will come on when the Traction Control System is limiting wheel spin See Trac System or Low Traction Light in the Index TRAC OFF This light lets you know that the Traction Control System has been disabled and will not limit wheel spin See Enhanced Traction System Warning Light or Low Traction Light in the Index TRAC switch If the vehicle has the Traction Control System you will have a disable switch on the far right side of the Driver Information Center The Traction Control System is automatically activated when you turn the ignition on This switch will activate deactivate the Traction Control System If you need to disable the system such as when you are stuck and are rocking the vehicle back and forth push this switch See Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow in the Index 2 87 yellow blue Trip Computer If Equipped M EM yeca KR EPA ou 400kM rr oes GT eg L VK UU am FUEL USED OIL LIFE 7CA7 aem AVGECON B RANGE 3100 and 3800 Engines When you start the engine the trip computer will display a mode A lighted oval will appear to the left of the mode currently being used 2 88 yellow blue LLLLLI TS eos s Ecostore d al a P d A a l uPGALMI VC PCR PAR oi tooKm PERFORMANCE SHIFT 25 19 em FUEL USED e OIL LIFE SS aem AVGECON B RANGE
206. low on COOLANT engine coolant Adding Coolant If you need more coolant add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank but be careful not to spill it If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty add coolant to the radiator See Engine Overheating in the Index The vehicle must be on a level surface When your engine is cold the coolant level should be at the COLD mark or a little higher When your engine is warm the level should be up to the HOT mark or a little higher 6 28 Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly With the coolant recovery tank you will almost never have to add coolant at the radiator Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a little when the engine and radiator are hot You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine yellow blue Power Steering Fluid 3100 Engine 3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine The power steering fluid reservoir is toward the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger s side When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate
207. mooth traffic flow Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp you should begin to check traffic Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed Switch on your turn signal check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow Once you are on the freeway adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it s slower Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass Before changing lanes check your mirrors Then use your turn signal Just before you leave the lane glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn t another vehicle in your blind spot Once you are moving on the freeway make certain you allow a reasonable following distance Expect to move slightly slower at night yellow blue When you want to leave the freeway move to the proper lane well in advance If you miss your exit do not under any circumstances stop and back up Drive on to the next exit The exit ramp can be curved sometimes quite sharply The exit speed is usually posted Reduce your speed according to your speedometer not to your sense of motion After driving for any distance at higher speeds you may tend to think you are going slow
208. n see Change Oil Soon Light in the Index A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation See Brake System Inspection under Periodic Maintenance Inspections in Part C of this schedule 7 5 Scheduled Maintenance 7 500 Miles 12 500 km Check Oil Life Monitor If engine oil and filter are changed reset monitor See Engine Oil in the Index An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Check Oil Life Monitor If engine oil and filter are changed reset monitor See Engine Oil in the Index An Emission Control Service See footnote Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Replace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnote T Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 22 500 Miles 37 500 km Check Oil Life Monitor If engine oil and filter are changed reset monitor See Engine Oil in the Index An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 6 yellow blue DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVIC
209. n t let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly yellow Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way it will lock If it does let it go back all the way and start again If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to yellow blue 3 To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies S VAP lt a a y i 1 D A J y iz b m x72 4 j Y D 7 A P d 1 32 force to the strong pelvic bones And you d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there s a
210. n the Index Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed You may notice this as stalling after start up stalling when you put the vehicle into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on If you experience one or more of these conditions change the fuel brand you use It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off If none of the above steps have made the light turn off have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed 2 77 Oil Warning Light If you have a problem with your oil pressure this light may stay on after you start your engine or come on when you are driving This indicates that oil is not going through your engine quickly enough to keep it lubricated The engine could be low on oil or could have some other oil problem Have it fixed right away The oil light could also come on in two other situations When the ignition is on but the engine is not running the light will come on as a test to show you it is working but the light will go out when you turn the ignition to START If it doesn t come on with the ignition on you may have a problem wi
211. n the display You will have to wait an hour with the ignition on before you can try again When you try again you will only have three more chances eight tries per chance to enter the correct code before INOP appears If you lose or forget your code contact your dealer 3 24 yellow blue Disabling the Theft Deterrent Feature Enter your secret code as follows pause no more than 15 seconds between steps 1 Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press the 1 and 4 buttons together Hold them down until SEC shows on the display 4 Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display 5 Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code 6 Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code 7 Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show indicating that the radio is no longer secured If the code entered is incorrect SEC will appear on the display The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered When battery power is removed and later applied to a secured radio the radio won t turn on and LOC will appear on the display To unlock a secured radio see Unlocking the Theft Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss earlier in this section Audio Steering Wheel Controls If Equipped If your vehicle has this feature you can control certain radio and remote playbac
212. nce When Towing sees 4 40 Making Turns 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee 4 38 Parking of Hills ze ree RRR ES 4 39 PASSING izsxia ex er edercpe y PLE ER PEE 4 38 Safety Chains 0 0 0 0 e eee 4 37 Tongue Weight 0 0 0 cee eee eee 4 36 Total Weight on Tires 0 0 00 000000 4 36 TOWNE 55e ste epena ales Satie cic noe nte icte d baie iu qs 4 34 Turn Signals eere ee ree re e 4 39 Weight heces epe SEE ke Her ees 4 35 Transaxle Fluid Automatic 00005 6 22 Transmitters i raea E a nero epe ETIN US RES 2 10 Matching to Your Vehicle 00 2 10 Remote Keyless Entry 00 00000 2 8 Resynchronization 00 e cece eee eee 2 11 Transportation Courtesy 000 0000 00 8e 8 10 NDAD M O 2 69 Before Leaving On A Long 0 4 23 Computer Bois eset ae enegie dcr dct Re sas 2 88 2 89 OdOmeter due eec osea m arie e dc Pre 2 69 Trunk 222b bet AY e RE watered san OE UE 2 22 Access Panel dusno e cag cach eae 2 61 Ajar Light eian E eR te ERES 2 87 2 91 LOCK EEEE E E EEEE EE ended 2 22 Mounted CD Changer 0 00000 3 19 Release Remote esee 2 22 TTY Us rs 44e e tiren Eae EEEE D m ps 8 5 Turn and Lane Change Signals suse 2 47 Turn Signal on Chime 0 00 00 ee 2 47 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever 2 46 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
213. nd just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose Don t let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit To wear it just attach it to the regular safety belt Checking Your Restraint Systems Now and then make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance yellow blue Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash If you ve had a crash do you need new belts After a very minor collision nothing may be necessary But if the belts were stretched as they would be if worn during a more severe crash then you need new belts If belts are cut or damaged replace them Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt wasn t being used at the time of the collision If an air bag inflates you ll need to replace air bag system parts See the part on the air bag system earli
214. ne Protection Operating Mode 3100 V6 Engine Only This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation Should an overheated engine condition exist an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of three cylinders helps prevent engine damage In this mode you will notice a significant loss in power and engine performance The low coolant light may come on and the temperature gage will indicate an overheat condition exists Towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided NOTICE After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode to avoid engine damage allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair The engine oil will be severely degraded Repair the cause of coolant loss and change the oil See Engine Oil in the Index If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine 5 10 yellow blue Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when your engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool NOTICE If your engine c
215. ne Running 2 39 Lighter 235 egere rre PET ae mes 2 62 Lights Air Bag Readiness sllsssess 1 24 2 71 Anti Lock Brake System Warning 2 73 4 7 Brake System Warning 002000 2 72 Change Oil Soon eiee ce rinne nieee daiane coraa 2 87 Charging System 0 00 0 e eee eae 2 71 D or Ag at vro ered eemeta et erre ede 2 87 2 91 Engine Coolant Temperature 2 79 Enhanced Traction System Warning 2 74 4 10 TOET OT P 2 54 Low Coolant Warning 00 2008 2 80 Low Buel sco tetas etatees nea cota bee es 2 81 L w Oil Level 42 remet ket e eod 2 70 LOW TaGC i once cide NI e ord toes e xs 2 74 2 87 2 91 Low Traction eeeeeeeee 2 74 4 10 Oil Warning esseeee e 2 78 Performance Shift 0 00 00 000 0000 2 90 Safety Belt Reminder 1 9 2 70 Service Engine Soon 0 00 00 eee eae 2 75 ECS OH nr get epe ei eeu 2 73 2 91 Trac Off eee RRRRPERRRER REIR 2 74 2 87 2 91 Traction Control System Warning 2 73 4 9 Trunk AJar iex eDe ee ERE aes 2 87 2 91 Washer Fluid Low 00000000 u 2 87 2 90 Loading Your Vehicle 0 0 0 0 eee eee 4 32 Lockout Prevention 0 0 cee eee eee eens 2 7 MEO CK P rr duke 2 4 Anti Lockout Feature 0 00 0 e eee eee 2 7 Automatic Door 0 0 eee ene 2 6 IDOOE 2 525 one tail ace a a eats y Ce dined Adee e
216. ne compartment as your battery You should always use the remote positive terminal instead of the positive terminal on your battery To uncover the remote positive terminal squeeze the sides of the plastic cap and slide the plastic cap off yellow blue Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sure the battery has enough water You don t need to add water to the ACDelco Freedom battery installed in every new GM vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you don t explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Don t get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately blue 5 Check that the jumper cables don t have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock AN CAUTION The vehicles could be damaged too Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive and negative will go to negative or a metal engine part Don t connect positive to negative o
217. need the right hitch Here are some rules to follow Your vehicle may have nonmetallic composite bumpers The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for hitches Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper type hitches to them Use only a frame mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch If you do then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch If you don t seal them deadly carbon monoxide CO from your exhaust can get into your vehicle see Carbon Monoxide in the Index Dirt and water can too yellow blue Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer Follow the manufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig And never allow safety chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes Because you have anti lock brakes do not try to tap into your vehicle s brake system If you do both brake systems won t work well or at all Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Befo
218. ng two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment This system has a range of about 3 feet 1 m up to 30 feet 9 m At times you may notice a decrease in range This is normal for any remote keyless entry system If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work try this Check to determine if battery replacement or resynchronization is necessary See the instructions that follow Check the distance You may be too far from your vehicle You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again If you re still having trouble see your dealer or a qualified technician for service Operation Remote Driver s Door and All Door Unlock When you press U
219. noise and affect windshield washer performance Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle yellow blue Fuel The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number VIN shows the code letter for your engine You will find the VIN at the top left of your instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number in the Index If you have the 3100 V6 engine VIN Code M or 3800 V6 engine VIN Code K use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher If you re using fuel rated at the recommended octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking your engine needs service But don t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when you re accelerating or driving up a hill That s normal and you don t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid of pinging It s the heavy constant knock that means you have a problem If you have the 3800 Supercharged V6 engine VIN Code 1 use premium unleaded gasoline rated at 91 octane or higher With the 3800 Supercharged engine in an emergency you may be able to use a lower octane as low as 87 if heavy knocking does not occur If you are using 91 or higher octane unleaded gasoline and you hear heavy knocking your engine needs service It is recommended that the gasoline meet specifications which have been developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers Association AAMA and endorsed by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers Associa
220. now the command is received The vehicle comes with this feature set in mode 4 To change the mode do the following 1 Follow the instructions for Entering Programming Mode listed previously 2 Press the LOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter 3 Count the number of chimes you hear The number of chimes tells you which mode the vehicle is set for You change the mode by pressing LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter again 4 Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions earlier in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle Content Theft Deterrent System With the Content Theft Deterrent System if anyone damages or enters your vehicle while the system is armed an alarm will sound and your headlamps will flash for two minutes To customize these features to your preference see Programmable Modes following Programmable Modes Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes yellow blue Mode 1 Damage Detection with Reduced Sensitivity If anyone seriously damages the vehicle tampers with the trunk lock or opens a door while the Content Theft Deterrent system is armed an alarm will sound and the headlamps will flash for up to two minutes Mode 2 Damage Detection Off If anyone tampers with the trunk lock
221. ns for Entering Programming Mode listed previously 2 Press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter 3 Count the number of chimes you hear The number of chimes tells you which mode the vehicle is set for You change the mode by pressing UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter again yellow blue 4 Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions earlier in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle Remote Lock and Unlock Confirmation With the Remote Lock and Unlock Confirmation feature you can program your vehicle to do the following When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock your vehicle your headlamps will flash briefly to let you know the command has been received If you press LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter again within five seconds the horn will sound briefly and the headlamps will flash briefly to let you know your vehicle is locked and when you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock your vehicle your headlamps will flash briefly to let you know the command has been received 2 17 To customize these features to your preference see Programmable Modes following Programmable Modes Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes Mode 1 Both Features Off Rem
222. nual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 15 00 Without Portfolio Owner s Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 10 00 CURRENT amp PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form please specify year and model name of the vehicle OR ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover yellow blue ORDER TOLL FREE Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt Please allow adequate time for postal NOTE For Credit Card Holders Only service If further information is needed write to the address shown below or call 1 800 551 4123 1 800 551 4123 Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM EST information within 30 days of delivery On returns a re stocking fee may be applied FAX Orders Only 1 313 865 5927 against the original order sevenn Car amp Light Truck Transmission Unit Repair Owner s Manual In Portfolio Owner s Manual Without Portfolio LC NOTE Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name and also the Check or Money name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent Order payable to Michigan Purchasers Mail completed order form to Helm Inc USA funds add 6 sales tax HELM INCORPORATED P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 only do not send cash Jj For pu
223. o press the RESET button on the right side of the instrument cluster yellow blue Tachometer The tachometer displays the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute rpm NOTICE Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area or engine damage may occur 2 69 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle The pictures will help you locate them Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions As you will see in the details on the next few pages some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they re working If you are familiar with this section you should not be alarmed when this happens Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there s a problem with your vehicle 2 70 yellow blue When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that tells you what to do about it Please follow this manual s a
224. o gives you important information about the number of people that can be in your vehicle and the total weight you can carry This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options 4 32 yellow blue a N MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP DATE GVWR GAWR FRT THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL Agh Me TOR VEHICLE SAFETY BUMPER dif T R ION DARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATIMQF M SIN ABOVE 199 ASS CAR M J The other label is the Certification label found on the rear edge of the driver s door It tells you the gross weight capacity of your vehicle called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for either the front or rear axle If you do have a heavy load spread it out Don t carry more than 167 pounds 75 kg in your trunk Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or either the maximum front or rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle NOTICE Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading If you put things inside your vehicle
225. o the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns NOTICE Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When you re turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer won t strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer When you tow a trailer your vehicle may need a different turn signal flasher and or extra wiring Check with your dealer The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps will also flash telling other drivers you re about to turn change lanes or stop When towing a trailer the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not It s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working Your vehicle has bulb warning lights When you plug a trailer lighting system into your vehicle s lighting system its bulb warning lights may not let you know if one of your lamps goes out So when you have a trailer lighting system plugged in be sure to check your vehicle and tra
226. od weather and road conditions Under less favorable conditions you ll want to go slower If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve do it before you enter the curve while your front wheels are straight ahead Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you You can avoid these problems by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you can t there isn t room That s the time for evasive action steering around the problem Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply your brakes See Braking in Emergencies earlier in this section It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available yellow blue An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you
227. ody You may notice this temperature difference more at some times than others Heating On cold days use LOWER The system will bring in outside air heat it and send it to the floor ducts If your vehicle has an engine coolant heater you can use it to help your system provide warm air faster when it s cold outside 0 F 18 C or lower An engine coolant heater warms the coolant your engine and heating system uses to provide heat See Engine Coolant Heater in the Index Ventilation For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed use UPPER with the A C button off to direct outside air through your vehicle Your vehicle also has the flow through ventilation system described later in this section Defogging and Defrosting Your system has two settings for clearing the front and side windows To defrost the windows quickly use DEF To warm passengers while keeping the windows clean use DEFOG yellow blue Rear Window Defogger LLL Your comfort control system has a button to operate your rear window defogger The electronic comfort control system has a button marked REAR The system with automatic temperature control has a button marked R DEF yellow blue The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to Ventilation System remove fog from the rear window Press the button to turn the rear defogger on It will turn itself off after about ten minutes If you turn it on again the rear
228. of PARK P All doors will unlock automatically when the ignition is turned off while the shift lever is in PARK P If you prefer to have your doors unlocked automatically at any time see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index If someone needs to get in or out of the vehicle after the doors have been automatically locked place the shift lever into PARK P Unlock all doors by using the power door lock switch or unlock just the door you want by using the inside lever If you have programmed your Automatic Door Locks see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index to unlock the doors when the shift lever is shifted into PARK P then the doors will be automatically unlocked for you The doors will automatically lock when you move your shift lever out of PARK P with the ignition on If you don t want the doors to unlock automatically when you turn the ignition off see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index Rear Door Security Locks 4 Door Models Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks that help prevent passengers from opening the rear doors of your vehicle from the inside To use one of these locks 1 Open one of the rear doors 2 On the inside of the rear door will be a lock Insert your master key into this lock and turn it counterclockwise This will engage the safety lock 3 Close the door 4 Do the same thing to the other rear door lock yellow blue The rear doors of your ve
229. ollowing distance It s the best defensive driving maneuver in both city and rural driving You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task Anything that distracts from the driving task such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call reading or reaching for something on the floor makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision with resulting injury Ask a passenger to help do things like this or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy It s the number one contributor to the highway death toll claiming thousands of victims every year Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle Judgment Muscular Coordination Vision Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years over 17 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with more than 300 000 people injured Many adults by some estimates nearly half the adult population choose never to drink alcohol so they never drive after dr
230. olorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this Pontiac will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first 6 57 yellow blue GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials PART NUMBER SIZE DESCRIPTION USAGE 994954 23 in x 25 in Polishing Cloth Wax Treated Exterior polishing cloth 1050172 050173 Iosorn sa 1052918 8 oz 0 237 L Armor All Protectant Protects leather wood acrylics Plexiglas plastic rubber and vinyl 1052925 16 oz 0 473 L Multi Purpose Interior Cleans carpets seats interior trim door panels Cleaner and floor mats 12345725 12 oz 0 354 L Spray on tire shine 12377964 16 oz 0 473 L Removes dust fingerprints and surface contaminants 12377966 16 oz 0 473 L Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish 12377984 16 oz 0 473 L Removes contaminants blemishes and swirl marks See your General Motors Parts Department for these products For exterior use only See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Not recommended for use on instrument panels 6 58 Vehicle Identification Number VIN SAMPLE4UXXM072675 ENGINE 1999 ji ASSEMBLY CODE MODEL YEAR PLANT This is the legal identifier for your vehicle It appears on a plate in the front
231. on the brakes Here s what happens with ABS You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard A computer senses that wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels As you brake your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember Anti lock doesn t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you you won t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even though you have anti lock brakes Using Anti Lock Don t pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti lock work for you You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise but this is normal Traction Control System With 3800 Supercharged V6 Engine Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits wheel spin This is especially useful in slippery road conditions The system operates only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction When this happens the system works the front brakes and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin yellow blue This light will come on when your traction control system is limiting wheel spin See Traction Control
232. on the power door lock switch 2 16 yellow blue 3 Count the number of chimes you hear The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for You change the mode by pressing unlock again 4 Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions earlier in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle Remote Driver s Unlock Control With the Remote Driver s Unlock Control feature you can program your vehicle to do the following When you press UNLOCK on your remote keyless entry transmitter the driver s door will unlock and when you press LOCK on your remote keyless entry transmitter again within five seconds all doors will unlock To customize these features to your preference see Programmable Modes following Programmable Modes Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes Mode 1 Remote All Doors Unlock When you press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter all doors will unlock Mode 2 Remote Driver s Door and All Doors Unlock When you press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter once the driver s door will unlock If you press UNLOCK again within five seconds all doors will unlock The vehicle comes with this feature set in mode 2 To change the mode do the following 1 Follow the instructio
233. ons may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask your service station operator whether or not the fuel contains MMT General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines If fuels containing MM T are used spark plug life may be reduced and your emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on If this occurs return to your authorized Pontiac dealer for service To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system allowing your emission control system to function properly Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel In addition gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier NOTICE Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Don t use it It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage wouldn t be covered under your warranty yellow blue Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel may be h
234. oorLocks 2 Re es e Re Rhet 2 6 Park Mechanism Check 0 00000 7 17 Automatic Transaxle Check E ereraa eE a O EE 7 15 Flid ee ae an E pada do Ubeud colat 6 22 Operation RC 2 32 Average Econ Message 0 0 0 0 0 0c eee 2 90 AULELY obras netri e a SAS RES NE tan oes gab oo 6 35 J mp Starting ii aeree ees eet Gees IRR REC 5 3 Replacement Remote Keyless Entry 2 10 DAVEE esc ck be gaia BERS SERERE AREE RA EE 2 56 Battery Continued Wamings hi veces Re Ree eR QU Ea A RAS E EUR 5 3 BBB Auto Line 0 0 cece eee eee 8 4 Before Leaving On A Long Trip 4 23 Better Business Bureau Mediation 8 4 Blizzard seamen a aa ina Mera nete edna tcs 4 29 Boost Gage cei eoe dt nd e gua ete gl Baraca beue rE 2 91 Brake Adg stment Jess dee aiaa rb ch E eee 6 34 Fluid rater ee en ate RGR iE p 6 32 Master Cylinder vereri eI Ree 6 32 Parking 23e wed e eue oed 2 36 Pedal Travel ies asa arene De YEA 6 34 Replacing System Parts 0 00 6 35 System Warning Light 000 2 72 peorge Mm 4 37 Transaxle Shift Interlock Check 2 40 7 16 Wel sensta a eme mex are er awe ess HE ER 6 34 Brakes Anti Lock eeeeeeeeee 4 7 Brakilg 2 e pedet amp tco debi qe ate da dne 4 6 Braking in Emergencies 00 00 ce eee eaee 4 11 Break In New Vehicle 00 000 cece eee 2 26 Brightness Cont
235. or opens a door while the Content Theft Deterrent system is armed an alarm will sound and the headlamps will flash for up to two minutes Mode 3 All Off The Content Theft Deterrent system is always disarmed Mode 4 Damage Detection with Normal Sensitivity If anyone damages the vehicle tampers with the trunk lock or opens the door while the Content Theft Deterrent system is armed an alarm will sound and the headlamps will flash for up to two minutes The vehicle comes with this feature set in mode 4 To change the mode do the following 1 Follow the instructions for Entering Programming Mode listed previously 2 Turn the parking lamps on then off 2 19 3 Count the number of chimes you hear The number of chimes tells you which mode the vehicle is set for You change the mode by turning the parking lamps on then off again 4 Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions earlier in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle Arming and Disarming the Content Theft Deterrent System To arm and disarm the Content Theft Deterrent system the system must be turned on by using Modes 1 2 or 4 listed previously in this section under Content Theft Deterrent System With the Arming and Disarming feature you can do the following Armthe sys
236. or replacement NOTICE The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index for more information 6 49 Used Replacement Wheels Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You can t know how it s been used or how far it s been driven It could fail suddenly and cause an accident If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel Tire Chains NOTICE If your vehicle has P225 60R16 size tires don t use tire chains They can damage your vehicle because there s not enough clearance NOTICE Continued 6 50 yellow blue NOTICE Continued Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions To help avoid damage to your vehicle drive slowly readjust or remove the device if it s contacting your vehicle and don t spin your wheels If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the front tires If you have other tires use tire chains only where legal and only when you must Use only SAE Class S type chains that are the proper size for your tires Install them on the front tires and tighten them as tightly
237. order The display will show RDM Press RDM again to turn off random play REV 5 Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track Release it to play the passage You will hear sound at a reduced volume The display will show elapsed time 3 18 yellow blue FWD 6 Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume The display will show elapsed time RECALL Press this button to see what track is currently playing Press RECALL again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing When a new track starts to play the track number will also appear Press RECALL a third time and the time of day will be displayed AM FM Press this button to play the radio when a disc is playing The disc will stop but remain in the player CD PLAY Press this button to change to the disc function when the radio is on EJECT Press this button to remove the disc or stop the disc and switch to the radio EJECT will work with the radio off yellow blue Trunk Mounted CD Changer Option If you load a disc label side up the disc will not play and an error will occur Gently push the tray back into the magazine slot Repeat this procedure for loading up to 12 discs in the magazine With the optional compact disc changer you can play up to 12 discs continuously Normal size discs may be played using the trays supplied in the magazine The small discs 8 cm can b
238. ote lock and unlock confirmation are disabled Mode 2 Exterior Lamps Flash Only Remote Lock Confirmation When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the vehicle the headlamps will flash briefly to let you know the command is received Remote Unlock Confirmation When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle or open the trunk the headlamps will flash briefly to let you know when the command is received Mode 3 Exterior Lamps Flash and Horn Sound Remote Lock Confirmation When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the vehicle the horn will sound briefly and the headlamps will flash briefly to let you know the command is received 2 18 yellow blue Remote Unlock Confirmation When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle or open the trunk the headlamps will flash briefly to let you know the command is received Mode 4 Exterior Lamps and Horn Sound on second LOCK press only Remote Lock Confirmation When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the vehicle the headlamps will flash briefly to let you know the command is received The horn will sound briefly and the headlamps will flash briefly if you press the LOCK button again within five seconds Remote Unlock Confirmation When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle or open the trunk the headlamps will flash briefly to let you k
239. out your tire warranty and where to obtain service see your Pontiac Warranty booklet for details yellow blue Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires The resulting accident could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them 6 43 Inflation Tire Pressure The Tire Loading Information label which is on the inside of the trunk lid shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they re cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km NOTICE Don t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right It s not If your tires don t have enough air underinflation you can get the following Too much flexing Too much heat Tire overloading Bad wear Bad handling Bad fuel economy NOTICE Continu
240. pation in this program yellow blue Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communicate with Pontiac by dialing 1 800 833 PONT TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance If a U S customer wishes to write to Pontiac the letter should be addressed to Pontiac s Customer Assistance Center United States Pontiac GMC Customer Assistance Center P O Box 436008 Pontiac MI 48343 6008 1 800 PM CARES 1 800 762 2737 1 800 833 7668 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 ROADSIDE yellow blue Canada Caribbean Numbers General Motors of Canada Limited 1 800 496 9992 English Puerto Rico Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1 800 496 9993 Spanish Puerto Rico iis Colonel Sam Drive 1 800 751 4135 English Dominican Republic Oshawa Ontario LIH 8P7 1 800 751 4136 Spanish Dominican Republic 1 800 496 9994 U S Virgin Islands 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 389 0009 Bahamas 1 800 263 7854 French 1 800 534 0122 Bermuda Barbados Antigua amp B V I 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs veda pO i Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 If toll free service is not available in the Caribbean
241. pearance Care Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle This section begins with service and fuel information and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels There is also technical information about your vehicle and a part devoted to its appearance care 6 2 Service 6 51 Appearance Care 6 3 Fuel 6 51 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle 6 5 Fuels in Foreign Countries 6 54 Care of Safety Belts 6 6 Filling Your Tank 6 55 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle 6 8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 6 56 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels If Equipped 6 8 Checking Things Under the Hood 6 56 Cleaning Tires 6 13 Engine Oil 6 57 Sheet Metal Damage 6 20 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 57 Finish Damage 6 21 Supercharger Oil 6 57 Underbody Maintenance 6 22 Automatic Transaxle Fluid 6 57 Chemical Paint Spotting 6 26 Engine Coolant 6 58 GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 6 29 Power Steering Fluid 6 59 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 31 Windshield Washer Fluid 6 59 Service Parts Identification Label 6 32 Brakes 6 60 Electrical System 6 35 Battery 6 66 Replacement Bulbs 6 36 Bulb Replacement 6 66 Capacities and Specifications 6 42 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 6 68 Air Conditioning Refrigerants 6 43 Tires 6 68 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Service Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it We hope you ll go to your dealer for all your service needs You ll get genuin
242. peed they can explode and you or others could be injured And the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can overheat That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage When you re stuck spin the wheels as little as possible Don t spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer 5 33 NOTICE Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back and forth you can destroy your transaxle For information about using tire chains on your vehicle see Tire Chains in the Index 5 34 yellow blue Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out First turn your steering wheel left and right That will clear the area around your front wheels If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System you should turn the system off See Enhanced Traction System in the Index Then shift back and forth between REVERSE R and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible Release the accelerator pedal while you shift and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle If that doesn t get you out after a few tries you may need to be towed out If you do need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle in the Index yellow blue Y Section 6 Service and Ap
243. position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Playing a Compact Disc Insert a disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in The compact disc symbol will appear on the display If the ignition and the radio are on the disc will begin playing CD will appear on the display next to the compact disc symbol If you want to insert a disc when the ignition is off first press EJECT yellow blue The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single discs Full size compact discs and the smaller discs are loaded in the same manner If you re driving on a very rough road or if it s very hot the disc may not play and E error and a number may appear on the radio display If the disc comes out it could be that The disc is upside down Itis dirty scratched or wet The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected please contact your dealer If your radio displays an error number write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem PREV 1 Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played If you hold the button or press it more than once the player will continue moving back through the disc NEXT 2 Press this button or the SEEK up arro
244. pright to face forward in the vehicle These forward facing restraints are designed to help protect children who are from 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and about 26 to 40 inches 66 to 102 cm in height or up to around four years of age One type a convertible restraint is designed to be used either as a rear facing infant seat or a forward facing child seat blue A booster seat F G is designed for children who are about 40 to 60 Ibs or even up to 80 Ibs 18 to 27 kg or even up to 36 kg and about four to eight years of age A booster seat is designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system Booster seats with shields use lap only belts however booster seats without shields use lap shoulder belts Booster seats can also help a child to see out the window 1 41 yellow blue When choosing a child restraint be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle If it is it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags Then follow the instructions for the restraint You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce t
245. pstick J Engine Air Cleaner Filter D Engine Coolant Reservoir yellow When you open the hood of the 3800 Supercharged engine you ll see A Windshield Washer Fluid E Power Steering Fluid Reservoir H Automatic Transaxle Dipstick low in engine compartment F Engine Oil Fill Cap I Brake Fluid Reservoir G Engine Oil Dipstick J Engine Air Cleaner Filter B Battery C Radiator Fill Cap D Engine Coolant Reservoir Before closing the hood be sure all the filler caps are on properly Then just pull the hood down and close it firmly 3800 Supercharged Engine If Equipped Your vehicle may have a 3800 Supercharged engine The supercharger is a device which is designed to pump more air into the engine than it would normally use This air mixed with fuel creates increased engine power Since the supercharger is a pump and is driven from an engine accessory drive belt increased pressure is available at all driving conditions The Powertrain Control Module PCM works with a vacuum control to regulate the increased pressure required during specific driving conditions When this increased pressure or boost is not desired such as during idling and light throttle cruising the excess air that the supercharger is pumping is routed through a bypass AII of these controls working together provide high performance character and fuel efficiency in the 3800 Supercharged engine yellow blue Engine Oil If the LOW OIL LEV
246. push cooling system including the radiator pressure cap down as you turn it Remove the pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops Don t press down while turning the pressure cap If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot there is still some pressure left engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine N CAUTION 5 17 yellow blue 3 If you have the 3800 V6 engine remove the 3800 Series II V6 engine cover shield to access the bleed valve A Clean the area around the engine oil fill tube and cap before removing Twist the oil fill tube with cap attached counterclockwise and remove it B If you have the supercharged engine remove the nut in the center of the cover shield C Lift the engine cover shield at the front slide the catch tab out of the engine bracket and remove the cover shield Thermostat Housing Thermostat Bypass 3100 V6 Tube 3100 V6 D Put the oil fill tube with cap attached in the valve cover oil fill hole until you re ready to replace the cover shield 5 18 Thermostat Housing 3800 V6 4 After the engine cools open the coolant air bleed valve or valves 3100 V6 engine There are two bleed valves One is located on the thermostat housing The ot
247. quaint yourself with it first Find out what your Delco Electronics system can do and how to operate all its controls to be sure you re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it Setting the Clock Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears Press and hold MIN until the correct minute appears There will be a two second delay before the clock goes into time set mode and the colon on the display will blink while in this mode 3 10 yellow blue AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player ra rum t Playing the Radio POWER VOL Push this knob to turn the system on and off To increase volume turn the knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume RECALL Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this button When the radio is playing press this knob to recall the station frequency Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display shows your selection TUNE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to choose radio stations Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it SEEK Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there PUSHBUTTONS The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 Just 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select the band 3 Tune in the desired st
248. r Litter Bag Holder On the front of the center console to the right of the accessory power outlet on the passenger s side of the vehicle there is a hook that can be used to hold a purse or litter bag Sunroof If Equipped The sunroof includes a sliding glass panel and a two piece sunshade The switch works only when the ignition or RAP is on See Retained Accessory Power in the Index yellow blue Push the rear of the switch once and the sunroof will open to the vent position only You will need to open the sunshade by hand Push the rear of the switch a second time and the sunroof will open the remainder of the way by itself This is the express open feature To close the sunroof push and hold the front of the switch until the sunroof closes The sunshade can only be closed by hand 2 65 yellow blue The Instrument Panel Your Information System The main components of the instrument panel are Side Window Defogger Vents Fog Lamp Switch Multifunction Lever Instrument Panel Cluster Emergency Flasher Button Full Floating Horn Column Shift Lever If Equipped Trip Computer Driver Information Center DIC Instrument Panel Vents FTanmmoadw gt Interior Lamp Control enon oe er RK yellow blue Exterior Lamp Control Tilt Wheel Control Audio Steering Controls If Equipped HUD Display Controls If Equipped Comfort Controls Ashtray and Cigarette Light
249. r in some cases to remain off If this happens have your headlamp system checked right away 6 60 yellow blue Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow etc the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem have it fixed Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power windows and other power accessories When the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses circuit breakers and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating Spare fuses are located in the instrument panel See Underhood Electrical Center in the Index yellow blue Instrument Panel Fuse Block FUSE USAGE CHART See Underhood Electrical Center For Spare Fuses BREAKERS STR WHL STR WHL HEADLAMP a RADIO AMP PWR LOCK HSEAT LUM R DEFOG poem eee nmm n C CIG LTR INT LAMP STOP LAMP AUX CNSL CD CHG ELA Lee CANISTER Printed in U
250. r protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures Engine Oil Additives Don t add anything to your oil Your dealer is ready to advise if you think something should be added When to Change Engine Oil Your vehicle has a computer that lets you know when to change your engine oil This is not based on mileage but on engine revolutions and engine operating temperature When the computer has calculated that the oil needs changing the Oil Life Monitor will indicate that a change is necessary The mileage between oil changes will vary depending on how you drive your vehicle usually between 3 000 miles 5 000 km and 7 500 miles 12 500 km since your last oil change Under severe conditions the indicator may come on before 3 000 miles 5 000 km Never drive your vehicle more than 7 500 miles 12 500 km or 12 months whichever occurs first without an oil change The system won t detect dust in the oil So if you drive in a dusty area be sure to change your oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or sooner Remember to reset the Oil Life Monitor whenever the oil is changed yellow blue How to Reset the Oil Life Monitor To reset the Oil Life Monitor after the oil has been changed 1 Press the MODE button until the light appears lit next to OIL LIFE 2 Press and hold the RESET button for three seconds The oil life percentage should change to 100 What to Do with Used Oil Did you know that used engine oil contains ce
251. r puers could be injured To he Sur your steering column or on the console between the seats vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P Maximum engine speed is limited on automatic transaxle vehicles when you re in PARK P or NEUTRAL N to protect driveline components from See Shifting Into PARK P in the Index If improper operation you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in There are several different positions for the shift lever the Midex 2 32 Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK P before starting the engine The vehicle has a Brake Transaxle Shift Interlock BTSI You must fully apply the regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition is in RUN If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing it all the way into PARK P while keeping the brake pedal pushed down Release the shift lever button if you have a console shift Then move the shift lever out of PARK P being sure to press the shift lever button if you have a console shift See Shifting Out of PARK P in the Index REVERSE R Use this gear to back up NOTICE Shifting to REVERSE R while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transaxle Shift to REVERSE R only after the vehicle is stopped To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging th
252. r you ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too 6 Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one yellow Don t let the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Now connect the black negative cable to the good battery s negative terminal Don t let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of 9 Attach the cable at least 18 inches 45 cm away from the dead battery but not near engine parts that move The electrical connection is just as good there but the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less the negative cable 10 Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run doesn t go to the the engine for a while dead battery 11 Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery If it won t start after a few tries it probably needs service It goes to a heavy unpainted metal part on the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery yellow blue 12 Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent Towing Your Vehicle electrical shorting Take care that they don t touch each other or any other metal To help avoid serious personal injury to you or others Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is being towed
253. rademarks of General Motors Corporation This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for Pontiac Division whenever it appears in this manual Please keep this manual in your vehicle so it will be there if you ever need it when you re on the road If you sell the vehicle please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it Litho in U S A Part No 10285614 A First Edition ii CERTIFIED WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH National Institute for AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE V J yellow blue We support voluntary technician certification For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a French Language Manual Aux propri taires canadiens Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en fran ais chez votre concessionaire ou au DGN Marketing Services Ltd 1577 Meyerside Dr Mississauga Ontario L5T 1B9 Copyright General Motors Corporation 1998 All Rights Reserved How to Use this Manual Many people read their owner s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle If you do this it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle In this manual you ll find that pictures and words work together to explain thing
254. ransmitter is damaged lost or if it fails to operate for any reason while the Content Theft Deterrent system is armed The Content Theft Deterrent system must be disarmed for the engine to run and while in Mode 2 the key can no longer disarm the system Mode 3 Standard Arming and Disarming The Content Theft Deterrent system will arm when you lock the doors using either power door lock switch while any door is open and the key is removed from the ignition The Content Theft Deterrent system will arm when you lock the doors with your remote keyless entry transmitter The key must be removed from the ignition when you lock the doors or the Content Theft Deterrent system will not arm The Content Theft Deterrent system will disarm when you unlock the doors with the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter Your vehicle comes with this feature in mode 1 yellow blue To change the mode do the following 1 Follow the instructions for Entering Programming Mode listed previously 2 Insert your key fully into any door key cylinder and 6 turn it to the unlock position This step is necessary to prevent accidental programming of this feature to Mode 2 Do not program this feature to Mode 2 without first reading the note contained in the description for that mode The door key lock cylinder must remain in the unlock position during Steps 2 through 4 Press the horn symbol on the remote keyless entry
255. rants Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs refrigerant be sure the proper refrigerant is used If you re not sure ask your dealer Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Engine Air Cleaner Filter All Engines 24508572 or A1096C Battery 3100 Code M e ki med emn 600 CCA 3800 Code K lsuseeseseee odei 690 CCA 3800 Supercharged Code 1 770 CCA Engine Oil Filter All Engines eseke c RR AC Type PF47 PCV Valve AIL Engines eee re CV892C Radiator Cap All Engines 4 6006 Rs AC Type RC27 6 68 Spark Plugs 3100 Code M 3800 Code K 3800 Supercharged Code 1 Wiper Blades Vehicle Dimensions Wheelbase Tread Width yellow blue DEG AC Type 41 940 Gap 0 060 inches 1 52 cm E AC Type 41 921 Gap 0 060 inches 1 52 cm AC Type 41 921 or NGK Type PTR4B 15 Gap 0 060 inches 1 52 cm 110 5 inches 280 7 cm 62 0 inches 157 5 cm 61 5 inches 156 1 cm 196 5 inches 499 1 cm 72 7 inches 184 5 cm 54 7 inches 139 0 cm yellow blue Y Section7 Maintenance Schedule This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety dependability and emission control performance 7 2 Introduction 7 14 Part B Owner Checks and Services 7 3 How this Section is Or
256. rce to the strong pelvic bones And you d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces Y X 4 Y 4 f S Jj The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or crash or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor 1 15 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 4 Door Models Before you begin to drive move the shoulder belt adjuster to the height that is right for you 1 16 yellow blue To move it down squeeze the release lever and the shoulder belt guide as shown and move the height adjuster to the desired position You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide After you move the adjuster to where you want it try to move it down without squeezing the release lever to make sure it has locked into position Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Q What s wrong with this The shoulder belt is too loose It won t give nearly as much protection this way yellow blue You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
257. rchases outside U S A please write to the above address for quotation C U S Order Processing 5 00 C MasterCard Canadian Postage See Note Below CUSTOMER S NAME ATTENTION i Discover n Account STREET ADDRESS NO P O BOX NUMBERS Number qm Check here if your billing address CITY STATE ZIP CODE Date mo yr address shown DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO AREA CODE CUSTOMER SIGNATURE GM PON ORD99 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents obligation Allow ample time for delivery are to make checks payable in U S funds To cover Canadian postage add 11 50 plus the U S order processing yellow blue f NOTES Section 9 Index yellow blue Accessory Power Outlet cc ces nce es rr eee 2 64 Add On Electrical Equipment 3 26 6 60 Ait BAP ione S a eec deed doled ciebat etr Pe pcd 1 22 How Does it Restrain 00 0 0 esee 1 26 How it Works 0 2 cece eee ee eee 1 24 Location 2 radere ne tne eon RA RR Eds 1 24 Readiness Light 00 00 0000 ee 1 24 2 71 SEVICE rr 1 28 What Makes it Inflate 00 0005 1 26 What Will You See After it Inflates 1 27 When Should it Inflate 0 000 1 26 Air Cleaner Filter 2 02 00 cece cece eee eee 6 20 Air Conditioning Automatic and Auxiliary Temperature Control 3 4 A
258. re setting out for the open road you ll want to get to know your rig Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself 4 37 Before you start check the trailer hitch and platform and attachments safety chains electrical connector lamps tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing You ll need more passing distance up ahead when you re towing a trailer And because you re a good deal longer you ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane 4 38 yellow blue Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand t
259. reakers in the Index A chime will sound if you leave the turn signal on for more than 3 4 mile 1 2 km Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam or high to low pull the multifunction lever all the way toward you Then release it When the high beams are on a light on the instrument panel also will be on Flash to Pass Feature When the headlamps are off pull the lever toward you to momentarily switch on the high beams to signal that you are going to pass When you release the lever they will turn off 2 47 Windshield Wipers You control the windshield wipers by turning the band marked WIPER on the turn signal multifunction lever For a single wiping cycle turn the band to MIST Hold it there until the wipers start then let go The wipers will stop after one cycle If you want more cycles hold the band on MIST longer For steady wiping at low speed turn the band to LOW For high speed wiping turn the band further to HIGH To stop the wipers turn the band to OFF You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes This can be very useful in light rain or snow Turn the band to choose the delay time The closer to LOW the shorter the delay Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If they re frozen to the windshield carefully loosen or thaw them If the blades do become damaged get new blades or blade inserts He
260. rench and protector guide B and wheel wrench C 5 24 If there is a wheel cover loosen the plastic nut caps with the wheel wrench They won t come off Then using the flat end of the wheel wrench pry along the edge of the cover until it comes off yellow blue Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 1 Using the wheel wrench loosen all the wheel nuts Don t remove them yet 2 Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the jack lift head a few inches 5 25 REAR EDGE OF FRONT WHEEL OPENING For jacking at the vehicle s front location put jack lift about 6 inches 15 cm from the rear edge of the front wheel opening or between the two bolts as shown 5 26 yellow blue FRONT EDGE OF REAR WHEEL OPENING For jacking at the vehicle s rear location put the jack lift head about 5 5 inches 14 cm from the front edge of the rear wheel opening or just behind the off set as shown Put the compact spare tire near you N CAUTION Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack N CAUTION Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the
261. rn and additional information See footnote yellow blue DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 11 yellow blue Scheduled Maintenance 97 500 Miles 162 500 km Check Oil Life Monitor If engine oil and filter are changed reset monitor See Engine Oil in the Index MILEAGE An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 100 000 Miles 166 000 km An Emission Control Service MILEAGE SERVIC Replace spark plugs EE NENNEN An Emission Control Service Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you haven t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore haven t changed your automatic transaxle fluid change both the fluid and filter 7 12 es yellow blue Scheduled Maintenance 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Drain flush and refill cooling system or every 60 months since la
262. rol 0 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 2 54 BIST Cheek parerenan eee rhe RR e Wee 2 40 7 16 Bulb Replacement eeeeeeeeeeees 6 36 Center High Mounted Stoplamp 6 39 Front Turn Signal 0 0 0 cee eee eee 6 38 Headlamps 6 63604 ke eme Rer RS 6 36 Taillamp MPH 6 40 Canada Ordering Service and Owner Publications 8 14 Canadian Roadside Assistance 00000 8 9 Capacities and Specifications 000 6 66 Carbon Monoxide 2 22 2 43 4 30 4 37 9 2 yellow blue Cassette Deck Service 0 00 e eee eee ee 7 14 Cassette Tape Player 0 00 00 eee eee 3 10 o T nm 3 27 Io Lm 3 12 CD Adapter Kits ie ERR et ERE RS 3 13 Center Console Storage 0 0 0 000000 2 61 Center High Mounted Stoplamp Bulb Replacement 6 39 Center Passenger Position 000 1 29 Certification Tire Label 00 200005 4 32 Chains Safety i heater da ind ste aeter Re eh 4 37 Chains Tite i scias e ee DeC E YE RES 6 50 Change Oil Soon Light 000 2 87 Changing a Flat Tire leslie esses esses 5 22 Charging System 0 0 0 ee eee eee eee eee 2 71 Checking Your Restraint Systems 1 53 Chemical Paint Spotting 000 6 57 Child R straintS 1 inc ERR ek y E Rd 1 38 Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position 1 44 Securing in the Center R
263. rtain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Don t let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a real threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all free flowing oil from the filter before disposal Don t ever dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Instead recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil ask your dealer a service station or a local recycling center for help 6 19 Engine Air Cleaner Filter To check or replace the air cleaner filter 1 Loosen the two clips on the top of the air cleaner housing and lift the filter cover tabs out of the housing 2 Push the filter cover housing toward the engine compressing the duct convolutes 3 Pull out the filter Install the air filter and make sure the filter cover tabs position through the slots in the housing 4 Anotch on the sides of the filter cover will indicate the correct engagement Re clip the two clips on the top of the housing when you are finished 6 20 blue Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine w
264. rules for smaller children and babies If a child will be riding in your vehicle see the part of this manual called Children Follow those rules for everyone s protection First you ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has We ll start with the driver position yellow blue Driver Position This part describes the driver s restraint system Lap Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap shoulder belt Here s how to wear it properly 1 Close and lock the door 2 Adjust the seat to see how see Seats in the Index so you can sit up straight 1 13 yellow blue 3 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 5 To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt 1 14 yellow blue The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies fo
265. rvice See footnote For supercharged engines only Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as needed or every 36 months whichever occurs first See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in this section An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service Replace air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Continued yellow blue DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 9 yellow blue Scheduled Maintenance 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Continued Inspect fuel tank cap and lines for damage or leaks Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage Replace parts as needed An Emission Control Service See footnoteT 67 500 Miles 112 500 km Check Oil Life Monitor If engine oil and filter are changed reset monitor See Engine Oil in the Index MILEAGE SERVIC An Emission Control Service See footnote bo Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Check Oil Life Monitor If engine oil and filter are changed reset monitor See Engine Oil in the Index MILEAGE SERVIC An Emission Contro
266. s Sheet Metal Damage If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed accelerated corrosion rust can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection yellow blue At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ringlet shaped disc
267. s lack of awareness or whatever There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery along with the hum of the tires on the road the drone of the engine and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy Don t let it happen to you If it does your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second and you could crash and be injured What can you do about highway hypnosis First be aware that it can happen Then here are some tips Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated with a comfortably cool interior Keep your eyes moving Scan the road ahead and to the sides Check your rearview mirrors and your instruments frequently If you get sleepy pull off the road into a rest service or parking area and take a nap get some exercise or both For safety treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency yellow blue Hill and Mountain Roads If you drive regularly in steep country or if you re planning to visit there here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable Keep your vehicle in good shape Check all fluid levels and also the brakes tires cooling system and transaxle These parts can work hard on mountain roads Know how to go down hills The most important thing to know is this let your engine do some of the slowing down Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill If you don t shift down your brakes could get
268. s quickly Index A good place to look for what you need is the Index in back of the manual It s an alphabetical list of what s in the manual and the page number where you ll find it Safety Warnings and Symbols You will find a number of safety cautions in this book We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning yellow blue These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people In the caution area we tell you what the hazard is Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard Please read these cautions If you don t you or others could be hurt You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book This safety symbol means Don t Don t do this or Don t let this happen iii Vehicle Damage Warnings Also in this book you will find these notices NOTICE These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle iv yellow blue In the notice area we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by your warranty and it could be costly But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage When you read other manuals you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words You ll also see warning labels on your vehicle They use the same words CAUTION or NOTICE Vehi
269. select a lower speed The system will maintain full cold or full hot operation at these settings Cold Weather Example When you start the vehicle in cold weather below freezing or after being parked overnight If your Driver Set Temperature is 73 F 23 C and you are in Full Automatic mode the system will automatically move the temperature doors to full hot The blower will start out at a low speed and the blower speed will increase as the engine warms up The air will be delivered to the floor As the interior of the vehicle warms up to your desired comfort point the blower will decrease and the temperature door will move to a cooler position to maintain your desired comfort As the cabin warms up or the sun load increases the system could switch to air delivered to the individual to the windshield and the floor Defog mode 3 5 Hot Weather Example When you start the vehicle in hot weather 80 F 27 C or after being parked during the day in full sun if your Driver Set Temperature is 73 F 23 C and you are in Full Automatic mode the system will automatically move the temperature doors to full cold The blower will be at low speed momentarily and then go to the high speed The air intake will be recirculated for maximum cooling performance As the interior of the vehicle cools down to your desired comfort point the blower will decrease and the temperature door will move to a warmer position to maintain your desired comfort As
270. si 420 kPa After installing the compact spare on your vehicle you should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare tire is correctly inflated The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph 105 km h for distances up to 3 000 miles 5 000 km so you can finish your trip and have your full size tire repaired or replaced where you want Of course it s best to replace your spare with a full size tire as soon as you can Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again NOTICE When the compact spare is installed don t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails The compact spare can get caught on the rails That can damage the tire and wheel and maybe other parts of your vehicle Don t use your compact spare on other vehicles And don t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires They won t fit Keep your spare tire and its wheel together NOTICE Tire chains won t fit your compact spare Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too Don t use tire chains on your compact spare yellow blue If You re Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck you will need to spin the wheels but you don t want to spin your wheels too fast The method known as rocking can help you get out when you re stuck but you must use caution If you let your tires spin at high s
271. so hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from down a hill You could crash Shift down to let driving in flat or rolling terrain your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope 4 25 Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL N or with the ignition off is dangerous Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down They could get so hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill 4 26 yellow blue Know how to go uphill You may want to shift down to a lower gear The lower gears help cool your engine and transaxle and you can climb the hill better Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane roads in hills or mountains Don t swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane As you go over the top of a hill be alert There could be something in your lane like a stalled car or an accident You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems Examples are long grades passing or no passing zones a falling rocks area or winding roads Be alert to these and take appropriate action yellow Include an ice scraper a small brush or broom a supply of windshield washer fluid a rag some
272. ssor yellow blue Temperature Knob The center knob changes the temperature of the air coming through the system Turn this knob toward red clockwise for warmer air Turn it toward blue counterclockwise for cooler air Mode Knob The right knob has several settings to control the direction of airflow MAX This setting recirculates much of the air inside your vehicle and sends it through the instrument panel outlets The air conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting unless the outside temperature is below 38 F 3 3 C Even when the compressor is running you can control the temperature gt o F4 UPPER This setting brings in outside air and directs it through the instrument panel outlets gt o ad BI LEVEL This setting brings in outside air and directs it two ways Half of the air is directed through the instrument panel outlets Most of the remaining air is directed through the floor ducts and a little to the defrost and side window vents e tyd FLOOR This setting sends most of the air through the ducts near the floor The remaining airflow comes out of the defroster and side window vents e od DEFOG This setting allows half of the air to go to the floor ducts and half to the defroster and side window vents Sp DEFROST This setting directs most of the air through the defroster Some of the air goes to the floor ducts and the side window vent The air conditioning compressor will run
273. st service whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant in the Index for what to use MILEAGE Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and neck Pressure test PF the cooling system and pressure cap An Emission Control Service SERVICED BY 7 13 Part B Owner Checks and Services Listed in this part are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Part D At Each Fuel Fill It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil in the Index for further details Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant in the Index for further details 7 14 yellow blue Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary See Windshield Washer Fluid in the Index for further details At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures
274. staffed by a team of technically trained advisors who are available 24 hours a day 365 days a year We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing minor repair information over the phone or making arrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearest Pontiac dealer We will provide the following services for 3 years 36 000 miles 60 000 km at no expense to you Fuel delivery Keys locked in vehicle Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service Change a flat tire Jump starts Courtesy Transportation See Courtesy Transportation section for details We have quick easy access to telephone numbers of the following additional services depending on your needs Hotels Glass replacement Tire repair facilities Rental vehicle or taxis Airports or train stations Police fire department or hospitals In many instances mechanical failures are covered under Pontiac s comprehensive warranty However when other services are utilized our advisors will explain any payment obligations you might incur For prompt and efficient assistance when calling please provide the following information to give the advisor Location of vehicle Telephone number of your location Vehicle model year and color Mileage of vehicle Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle license plate number yellow blue Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or driver when in Pontiac s judgement the cla
275. sure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle And if you tow a trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index for more information about your vehicle s maximum load capacity 4 36 yellow blue If you re using a weight carrying hitch the trailer tongue A should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B If you have a weight distributing hitch the trailer tongue A should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B After you ve loaded your trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they aren t you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires Be sure your vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires You ll find these numbers on the Tire Loading Information label found on the inside of the trunk lid or see Loading Your Vehicle in the Index Then be sure you don t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle including the weight of the trailer tongue Hitches It s important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you ll
276. t Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it won t work and it could damage your vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system NOTICE If the other system isn t a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles aren t touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you don t want You wouldn t be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump starting procedure Put an automatic transaxle in PARK P before setting the parking brake 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Turn off the radio and all lamps that aren t needed This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries And it could save your radio NOTICE If you leave your radio on it could be badly damaged The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty yellow blue An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan 4 Find the positive and negative terminals on each battery Your vehicle has a remote positive jump starting terminal The terminal is on the same side of the engi
277. t But you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you re upside down And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted iS If my vehicle has air bags why should I have to wear safety belts E Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future But they are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts Even if you re in a vehicle that has air bags you still have to buckle up to get the most protection That s true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions 1 12 yellow blue Q If Pm a good driver and I never drive far from A home why should I wear safety belts You may be an excellent driver but if you re in an accident even one that isn t your fault you and your passengers can be hurt Being a good driver doesn t protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Adults This part is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different
278. t passenger seat as far back as it will go It s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat Wherever you install it be sure to secure the child restraint properly Canadian law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top strap and that the strap be anchored Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it 1 43 If your child restraint has a top strap it should be anchored If you need to have an anchor installed your dealer can obtain a kit with anchor hardware and installation instructions specifically designed for this vehicle The dealer can then install the anchor for you This work will be done for you free of charge Or you may install the anchor yourself using the instructions provided in the kit Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position any e 7 You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Put the restraint on the seat 1 44 yellow blue 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The chi
279. t the Tire Loading Information label The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC Spec number on each tire s sidewall When you get new tires get ones with that same TPC Spec number That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance handling speed rating traction ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle If your tires have an all season tread design the TPC number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type bias bias belted or radial as your original tires Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels It s all right to drive with your compact spare though It was developed for use on your vehicle If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle yellow blue Uniform Tire Quality Grading
280. t a very slow rate to let you know the system is armed Arming with the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter The alarm system will arm when you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors after the key is removed from the ignition The security light will turn on to let you know the system is arming After all doors are closed and locked the security light will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know the system is armed Arming Confirmation If remote unlock confirmation is on see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index the headlamps will flash briefly to let you know when the alarm system has armed Disarming with the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter The alarm system will disarm when you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the doors The security light will stop flashing to let you know the system is disarmed yellow blue Disarming with the Key The alarm system will disarm when you use the key to unlock the doors The security light will stop flashing to let you know the system is disarmed If you would like the key to disarm the alarm system see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index Nuisance Alarms If you experience nuisance alarms alarms which are not caused by the opening of a door and are not desired you may need to reduce the damage detection sensitivity Try programming the Content Theft Deterrent to mode 1 see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index If
281. t into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord won t reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps yellow blue 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you don t it could be damaged How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in The answer depends on the outside temperature the kind of oil you have and some other things Instead of trying to list everything here we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you ll be parking your vehicle The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area 2 31 yellow blue Automatic Transaxle Operation PARK P This locks the front wheels It s the best position to use when you start the engine because the vehicle can t move easily It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly The automatic transaxle may have a shift lever on the You o
282. t locks To get out tilt the seatback fully forward If the seatback isn t locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked yellow blue Safety Belts They re for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts And it explains the Supplemental Restraint System SRS or air bag system Don t let anyone ride where he or she can t wear a safety belt properly If you are in a crash and you re not wearing a safety belt your injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passengers belts are fastened properly too It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up See Safety Belt Reminder Light in the Index yellow blu
283. t your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately and is still operative you are encouraged to drive the vehicle until scheduling can be accomplished If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle Off for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same day repair 8 10 yellow blue Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait Pontiac helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Participating dealerships can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes a one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs reimbursement up to 30 per day five days maximum may be available for the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus In addition should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to 10 per day five day maximum may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts Courtesy Rental Vehicle When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
284. taminants direct sunlight and extreme heat If they aren t they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 50 hours of use Your radio may display CLN to indicate that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer If this message appears on the display your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player If you notice a reduction in sound quality try a known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality clean the tape player The recommended cleaning method for your cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action non abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealership GM Part No 12344789 yellow blue When using a scrubbing action non abrasive cleaning cassette it is normal for the cassette to eject because your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected use the following steps 1 Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press and hold the TAPE PLAY button for
285. tch forward or rearward To raise or lower the seat push the switch up or down To raise or lower the front portion of your seat push the front of the switch up or down To raise or lower the rear portion of your seat push the rear of the switch up or down yellow The knob that controls this feature is located on the right side of the driver s seat about halfway down the seatback Turn the knob toward the front of the vehicle to increase lumbar support Turn the knob toward the rear of the vehicle to decrease lumbar support yellow If your vehicle is equipped the heated seat switch is on the center console just behind the open storage bin Press LO to warm the seat to a lower temperature Press HI to warm the seat to a higher temperature To turn this feature off place the switch in the center position If your vehicle is equipped there will be a control switch on the left side of the driver s seat cushion just in front of the reclining seatback lever To increase or decrease lumbar support push the switch forward or rearward To adjust the lumbar support up or down push the switch up or down Reclining Front Seatbacks Lift the lever to release the seatback then move the But don t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving seatback to where you want it Release the lever to lock the seatback in place Pull up on the lever without A pushing on the seatback and the seatback will CAUTION move
286. tem when you lock the doors using either power door lock switch while any door is open and the key is removed form the ignition Arm the system when you lock the doors with your remote keyless entry transmitter and the key is removed form the ignition 2 20 yellow blue Disarm the system when you unlock the doors with your key or remote keyless entry transmitter To customize these features to your preference see Programmable Modes following Programmable Modes Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes Mode 1 Power Door Lock Switch Arming Off The Content Theft Deterrent system will arm when you lock the doors with the remote keyless entry transmitter The key must be removed from the ignition when you lock the doors or the Content Theft Deterrent system will not arm The Content Theft Deterrent system will disarm when you unlock the doors with the keys or the remote keyless entry transmitter Mode 2 Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Arm Disarm Only The Content Theft Deterrent system will arm when you lock the doors with the remote keyless entry transmitter The key must be removed from the ignition when you lock the doors or the content theft deterrent system will not arm The Content Theft Deterrent system will disarm when you unlock the doors with the remote keyless entry transmitter NOTE While this mode provides increased security it can be a problem if the remote keyless entry t
287. th the fuse or bulb Have it fixed right away If you make a hard stop the light may come on for a moment This is normal 2 78 yellow blue Don t keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced NOTICE Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty Low Oil Level Light The engine is equipped with an oil level monitoring LOW OIL system When the ignition key is turned to ON the LEVEL LOW OIL LEVEL light will briefly flash If the light does not flash have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there s a problem If the light stays on stop the vehicle on a level surface and turn the engine off Check the oil level using the engine oil dipstick See Engine Oil in the Index The oil level monitoring system only checks oil level during the brief period when the ignition key is between RUN and START It does not monitor engine oil level when the engine is running Additionally an oil level check is only performed if the engine has been turned off for a considerable period of time allowing the oil normally in circulation to drain back into the oil pan yellow blue Engine Coolant Temperature Light This light tells you that the engine coolant has overheated or the radiator TEM P cooling f
288. the cabin cools down or the sun load decreases the system could switch to air delivered to A C vents and the floor Bi level mode Manual Control Fan Buttons The fan buttons select the amount of air you want when the system is not in AUTO The display will show the fan speed by illuminating a maximum of seven fan bars yellow blue Mode Button The center panel has several settings to control the direction of airflow when the system is not in AUTO The indicator light on the button will glow when the button is pressed To access the various modes available continue to press the MODE button until the desired mode appears on the display If you prefer to manually control the heating cooling and ventilation in your vehicle push UPPER BI LEV LOWER DEFOG or DEF AUTO will go off the display Set the system to the temperature and fan speed you want The system will try to maintain the temperature you set using the mode you select The following suggestions will help the system run more efficiently in manual mode lt amp RECIRC This setting recirculates much of the air inside your vehicle and sends it through the instrument panel outlets The air conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting unless the outside temperature is below 38 F 3 3 C gt o 74 UPPER This setting brings in the outside air and directs it through the instrument panel outlets gt o ad BI LEV This setting brings in the outside
289. the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other the alignment may need to be reset If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road your wheels may need to be rebalanced Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle yellow blue Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts f
290. the floor ducts If your vehicle has an engine coolant heater you can use it to help your system provide warm air faster when it s cold outside 0 F 18 C or lower An engine coolant heater warms the coolant your engine and heating system use to provide heat See Engine Coolant Heater in the Index Ventilation For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed use UPPER with the A C button off to direct outside air through your vehicle Your vehicle also has the flow through ventilation system described later in this section Defogging and Defrosting Your system has two settings for clearing the front and side windows To defrost the windows quickly use DEFROST with the temperature knob all the way in the red area To warm passengers while keeping the windows clean use DEFOG 3 4 yellow blue Air Conditioning with Automatic and Auxiliary Temperature Control If Equipped im PH ed LEM T oN umm ax LIAE wa cere With this system you set a desired cabin temperature You can then either let the system automatically control airflow direction and amount to maintain the desired cabin temperature or you can manually adjust it The system works best if you keep your windows closed while using it Automatic Control For the most efficient operation you should set the system temperature and press AUTO The system will select the best fan speed and airflow settings to k
291. the lower 3100 Engine level The fluid level must be in the cross hatched area 4 If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transaxle fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 6 24 If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level into the cross hatched area on the dipstick Pull out the dipstick 2 Using a long neck funnel add enough fluid at the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level It doesn t take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5 L Don t overfill NOTICE We recommend you use only fluid labeled DEXRON III because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transaxle Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON III is not covered by your new vehicle warranty 3 After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as described under How to Check 4 When the correct fluid level is obtained push the dipstick back in all the way yellow blue Radiator Pressure Cap NOTICE Your radiator cap is a 15 psi 105 kPa pressure type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck When you replace your radiator pressure cap an ACDelco cap
292. three seconds The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds 4 Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette 5 Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer s recommended cleaning time When the cleaning cassette has been ejected the cut tape detection feature is active again 3 27 You may also choose a non scrubbing action wet type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on its own non scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner The use of a non scrubbing action dry type cleaning cassette is not recommended After you clean the player press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced Care of Your Compact Discs Handle discs carefully Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust If the surface of a disc is soiled dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution and clean it wiping from the center to the edge Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling discs Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge 3 2
293. tion and Exit Lighting With Delayed Illumination the interior lamps will stay on for about 25 seconds after all doors are closed With Exit Lighting the interior lamps will come on and stay on for about 25 seconds whenever you remove the key from the ignition To customize these features to your preference see Programmable Modes following Programmable Modes Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes Mode 1 Both Features Off The interior lamps will turn on or off at the same instant that a door is opened or closed Mode 2 Delayed Illumination Only The interior lamps will stay on for about 25 seconds after all the doors are closed or until you lock the doors Mode 3 Exit Lighting Only The interior lamps will come on whenever you remove the key from the ignition and stay on for about 25 seconds or until you lock the doors Mode 4 Both Features On This combines modes 2 and 3 Your vehicle comes with this feature set in mode 4 2 13 To change the mode do the following 1 Follow the instructions for Entering Programming Mode listed previously 2 Tum the interior lamps dial all the way clockwise and then back slightly counterclockwise 3 Count the number of chimes you hear The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for You change the mode by turning the interior lamps dial all the way clockwise and then back slightly counterclockwise 4 Repeat Step 2
294. tion for better vehicle performance and engine protection Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasolines For more information write to American Automobile Manufacturer s Association 7430 Second Ave Suite 300 Detroit MI 48202 Be sure the posted octane for premium is at least 91 at least 89 for middle grade and 87 for regular If the octane is less than 87 you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive If it s bad enough it can damage your engine If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards indicated on the underhood emission control label it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications If such fuels are not available in states adopting California emissions standards your 6 4 yellow blue vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and or your vehicle may fail a smog check test See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index If this occurs return to your authorized Pontiac dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause of failure In the event it is determined that the cause of the condition is the type of fuels used repairs may not be covered by your warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissi
295. top Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill gasoline Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle in the Index When you put the cap back on turn it to the right clockwise until you hear a clicking sound Make sure you fully install the cap The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index yellow blue NOTICE If you need a new cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and your fuel tank and emissions system may be damaged See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index yellow blue Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the Hood Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in An electric fan under the hood can start up and your vehicle Static electricity discharge from the injure you even when the engine is not running container can ignite the gasoline vapor You can Keep hands clothing and tools away from any be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this underhood electric fan occurs To help avoid injury to you and others Dispense gasoline only into approved containers Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle in
296. tops it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for up to 15 seconds This clears the extra gasoline from the engine NOTICE Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer If you don t your engine might not perform properly If you ever have to have your vehicle towed see the part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle See Towing Your Vehicle in the Index yellow blue Starting Your 3800 Series II V6 Engine Without pushing the accelerator pedal turn your ignition key to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm NOTICE Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter 2 If it doesn t start right away hold your key in START for about three to five seconds at a time until your engine starts Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter 2 29 3 If your engin
297. transmitter Count the number of chimes you hear The number of chimes tells you which mode the vehicle is set for You change the mode by pressing the horn symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter again Repeat Step 3 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want Remove the key from the door key cylinder The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions earlier in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 2 21 Trunk It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You can t see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death If you must drive with the trunk open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the trunk Make sure all other windows are shut e Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed with the setting on VENT That will force outside air into your vehicle See Comfort Controls in the Index If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way See Engine Exhaust in the Index 2 22 yellow blue Trunk Lock To unlock the trunk from the outside insert the master key and turn the key clockwise You can also press the trunk symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped Remote Trunk Re
298. trol of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid your wheels aren t rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If you have the Enhanced Traction System remember It helps avoid only the acceleration skid 4 16 yellow blue If you do not have the Enhanced Traction System or if the system is off then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If your vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough your vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety you ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surfac
299. ty is for your vehicle you should read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly That s the reason for this part In it are many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer Load pulling components such as the engine transaxle wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads generating extra heat What s more the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance increasing the pulling requirements If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do here are some important points There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure your rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you ll be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police Consider using a sway control You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls Don t tow a trailer at all during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km your new vehicle is driven Your
300. u is qualified to do so yellow blue The air bag system does not need regular maintenance yellow blue Center Passenger Position 1 Lap Belt If your vehicle has front and rear bench seats someone can sit in the center positions When you sit in a center seating position you have a lap safety belt which has no retractor To make the belt longer tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt 1 29 To make the belt shorter pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug Buckle position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap shoulder belt If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 30 yellow blue Rear Seat Passengers It s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Rear passengers who aren t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions an e 7 Lap Shoulder Belt The positions next to the windows have lap shoulder belts Here s how to wear one properly Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do
301. uckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 6 To tighten the belt feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger yellow Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle s safety belts If you have the choice a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat But they need to use the safety belts properly Children who aren t buckled up can be thrown out in a crash Children who aren t buckled up can strike other people who are yellow blue Never do this Here two children are wearing the same belt The belt can t properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A belt must be used by only one person at a time Q What if a child is wearing a lap shoulder belt but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
302. uel ssleeleese esses 6 5 French Language Manual esses esses ii Front Turn Signal Bulb Replacement 6 38 Fuel 421204o5e0tos teo Ne sd ace Dedi un i ees 6 3 Canada ceee ae ate ote eps Pere eb diae eu aT tena CER 6 5 Filling a Portable Container 0 6 8 Filling Your Tank 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 6 6 Gage eigse ee he ker ERE CE EUG nea rare 2 80 In Foreign Countries 0 0 00 0 eee eee 6 5 Low Light soda dda mc teat wee hae eee oe 2 81 Fuel Used Message esee 2 90 Fuses and Circuit Breakers esse 6 60 Gages hn MP 2 91 Engine Coolant Temperature 2 80 BU c oe roro usd once E rete n 2 80 Garage Door Opener seslesessles esses 2 59 GAWR iceiggcekdp eee pere he nte vmm e bene 4 32 Gear Positions Automatic Transaxle 2 32 GIOVE BOX ov eurae et beet oi ole tas e prets e 2 59 GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities 8 7 Graphic Equalizer 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee 3 16 Gross Axle Weight Rating 000 4 32 yellow blue Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 00 4 32 Guide en Francais 1 inec eee cee eens ii GVWR iie ca castor Mekearyais age bade ah sSae uoce e batting tc raye songs 4 32 Hatogen Bulbs eaaa a pA a a dtes partes 6 36 Hazard Warning Flashers 00 00000005 5 2 Head Restraints 5 sssseeerke bI GER rritin 1 6 Headlamps sosi
303. until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions earlier in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle Automatic Door Locks With Automatic Door Locks all doors will automatically lock when you shift out of PARK P and automatically unlock when the ignition is turned to OFF To customize these features to your preference see Programmable Modes following 2 14 yellow blue Programmable Modes Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes Mode 1 Both Features Off Automatic door locking and unlocking are disabled You will always need to lock your doors manually before driving to increase occupant safety All doors will lock when you press the power door lock switch rearward or when you press LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped All doors will unlock when you press the power door lock switch forward or when you press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped Mode 2 Automatic Door Locking Only Automatic Door Unlocking The automatic door unlock feature is turned off Automatic Door Locking Shift out of PARK P with the ignition on and the driver s door closed all doors will lock automatically Mode 3 Automatic Unlocking with the Ignition Off Automatic Door Unlocking Turn off the ignition with t
304. urn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you aren t careful See Jump Starting in the Index for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods Also for your audio system see Theft Deterrent Feature in the Index 6 35 Bulb Replacement In this section you ll find directions for changing the bulbs on your vehicle See Replacement Bulbs in the Index to find the type of bulb you should use Halogen Bulbs Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package 6 36 yellow blue Headlamps 1 Open the hood and support properly 2 Remove the two bolts from the top of the headlamp assembly yellow 3 Carefully remove the headlamp assembly from the 5 Turn the lamp socket ring a quarter of a turn vehicle Be careful to avoid scratching or chipping counterclockwise to remove it from the the paint on the vehicle while removing headlamp assembly 4 Liftthe plastic tab on the electrical connector and pull the connector 10 11 12 Pull the bulb from the socket Place the new bulb into the socket Turn the lamp socket ring a quarter of a turn clockwise to place it back into the headlamp assembly Lift the plastic tab on the electri
305. usly injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt have a qualified technician do the work If you are skilled enough to do some work on your vehicle you will probably want to get the service information See Service and Owner Publications in the Index yellow blue Part B Owner Checks and Services tells you what should be checked and when It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections explains important inspections that your dealer s service department or another qualified service center should perform Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants lists some recommended products to help keep your vehicle properly maintained These products or their equivalents should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done Part E Maintenance Record provides a place for you to record the maintenance performed on your vehicle Whenever any maintenance is performed be sure to write it down in this part This will help you determine when your next maintenance should be done In addition it is a good idea to keep your maintenance receipts They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services Using Your Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle
306. utomatic Control 0 00 eee 3 5 Electronic Controls 2 0 00 cece eee eee ee eee 3 2 Manual Control 0 0 eee eee eee eee ee 3 6 Air Conditioning Refrigerants 0 6 68 Alignment and Balance Tire 0 6 48 Aluminum Wheels Cleaning 0 6 56 Antena 2e ecc t i tote dratenitdae pee Ata eite eed 3 28 B ackglass 5 2 bv ee E Ra ERE 3 29 Fixed Mast sni Re ew ERE PER ELE ROER EG 3 28 AnUfte6ze Loop Fes eee Ne VENAE guide WAGE 6 26 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light 2 73 4 7 Brakes pace cinlsduy ahaa Shad EUR edP gales Gees 4 7 Anti Lockout Feature 0 0 0 0 e eee eee 2 7 Anti Theft Radio 2 0 0 ce eee 3 22 Appearance Care 0 0 cee eee 6 51 Appearance Care Materials 0000 6 58 Arbitration Program 0 2 0 0 eee eee 8 4 ZNETDUWILEE iei Cien tet adita eate Noting bie rers 2 25 Confirmation serron tas o eed a gel elei 2 25 Power Lock Switch 0 0000 2 24 Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter 2 25 Armrest Rear Storage 0 00 2 61 Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter 2 62 Audio Controls Steering Wheel 3 25 Audio Equipment Adding 00 3 26 Audio Systems lseleeeeee eee eee 3 10 Automati o oo ey aden gt bate ac UR ais toad tai p se meredith 2 6 Control Climate Control System 3 5 D
307. ved road feel Steering Tips Driving on Curves It s important to take curves at a reasonable speed A lot of the driver lost control accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves Here s why 4 12 yellow blue Experienced driver or beginner each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels If there s no traction inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction If you ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice you ll understand this The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and your speed While you re in a curve speed is the one factor you can control Suppose you re steering through a sharp curve Then you suddenly accelerate Both control systems steering and acceleration have to do their work where the tires meet the road Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places You can lose control Refer to Traction Control System or Enhanced Traction System in the Index What should you do if this ever happens Ease up on the accelerator pedal steer the vehicle the way you want it to go and slow down Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed Of course the posted speeds are based on go
308. vehicle blue 3 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle clockwise Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground for the spare tire to fit under the vehicle Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire 5 27 yellow blue 4 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts If you do the nuts might come loose Your wheel could fall off causing a serious accident 5 Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface 6 Replace the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel Rust or dirt on the wheel or on the parts to is held against the hub which it is fastened can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off 5 28 yellow blue 8 Tighten the wheel nuts 1 firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown ay OQ 9 Replace wheel trim If present tighten plastic caps by hand With a wheel wrench tighten plastic caps an additional 1 4 turn 7 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise Lower the jack completely
309. w to go to the start of the next track If you hold the button or press it more than once the player will continue moving forward through the disc 3 15 RDM 3 Press this button to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order The display will show RDM Press RDM again to turn off random play REV 5 Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track Release it to play the passage You will hear sound at a reduced volume The display will show elapsed time FWD 6 Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume The display will show elapsed time RECALL Press this button to see what track is currently playing Press RECALL again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing When a new track starts to play the track number will also appear Press RECALL a third time and the time of day will be displayed AM FM Press this button to play the radio when a disc is playing The disc will stop but remain in the player CD PLAY Press this button to change to the disc function when the radio is on EJECT Press this button to remove the disc or stop the disc and switch to the radio EJECT will work with the radio off 3 16 yellow blue AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Equalizer If Equipped Playing the Radio POWER VOL Push this knob to turn the system on and off To increase volume turn the knob clockwise
310. whichever occurs first Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL is not covered by your new vehicle warranty What to Use Use a mixture of one half clean drinkable water and one half DEX COOL coolant which won t damage aluminum parts If you use this coolant mixture you don t need to add anything else Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid like alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant yellow blue NOTICE If you use an improper coolant mixture your engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost wouldn t be covered by your warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts If you have to add coolant more than four times a year have your dealer check your cooling system NOTICE If you use the proper coolant you don t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system These can be harmful 6 27 yellow blue Checking Coolant If this LOW COOLANT light comes on and stays on LOW it means you re
311. winter outer Here are some tips for winter driving clothing a small shovel a flashlight a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles And if you will V Pavey our yenicle AN coor shaper Wann be driving under severe conditions include a small bag You may want to put winter emergency supplies in of sand a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags your trunk to help provide traction Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction However if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road you can have a very slippery situation You ll have a lot less traction or grip and will need to be very careful 4 28 yellow blue What s the worst time for this Wet ice Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all You can get wet ice when it s about freezing 32 F 0 C and freezing rain begins to fall Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there Whatever the condition smooth ice packed blowing or loose snow drive with caution If you have the Enhanced Traction System keep the system on It will improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road Even though your vehicle has this system you ll want to slow down and a
312. xle fluid Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle fluid level if you have been driving When outside temperatures are above 90 F 32 C Athigh speed for quite a while In heavy traffic especially in hot weather While pulling a trailer To get the right reading the fluid should be at normal operating temperature which is 180 F to 200 F 82 C to 93 C Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles 24 km when outside temperatures are above 50 F 10 C If it s colder than 50 F 10 C you may have to drive longer Checking the Fluid Level Park your vehicle on a level place Keep the engine running With the parking brake applied place the shift lever in PARK P With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then position the shift lever in PARK P yellow blue Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes Then without shutting off the engine follow these steps 3100 Engine 3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine 1 The transaxle fluid dipstick handle is the red loop near the back of the engine Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 6 23 yellow blue 2 Push it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again 3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine 3 Check both sides of the dipstick and read
313. y are located on the passenger s side of the vehicle below the glove box For additional information on accessing these leads and electrical hookup please refer to the service manual 2 85 yellow blue Driver Information Center DIC If Equipped c8 LOW TRAC AJAR TRAG OFF The Driver Information Center DIC gives you important safety and maintenance facts When you turn the ignition on all of the Driver Information Center lights light up for a few seconds Then it goes to work 2 86 Functions si 1 If one of the doors is ajar a light will appear next to that door on the vehicle outline CHANGE OIL SOON This light will appear when the system predicts that the oil s remaining useful life is almost up The system predicts remaining oil life using inputs from length of drives coolant temperature engine rpm and vehicle speed It alerts you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with the vehicle s driving conditions After changing the oil the system must be reset With the ignition key in ON but the engine off fully push and release the accelerator pedal slowly three times within five seconds If the CHANGE OIL SOON light flashes the system is resetting Turn the ignition key to OFF then start the vehicle If the CHANGE OIL SOON light comes back on the Oil Life Monitor has not reset Repeat the procedure yellow blue S LOW This light will come on when the ignition is on and the fluid container is
314. yellow blue Y The 1999 Pontiac Grand Prix Owner s Manual 1 1 Seats and Restraint Systems This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly It also explains the SRS system 2 1 Features and Controls This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle 3 1 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system 4 1 Your Driving and the Road Here you ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions 5 1 Problems on the Road This section tells you what to do if you have a problem while driving such as a flat tire or overheated engine etc 6 1 Service and Appearance Care Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good 7 1 Maintenance Schedule This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use 8 1 Customer Assistance Information This section tells you how to contact Pontiac for assistance and how to get service and owner publications It also gives you information on Reporting Safety Defects on page 8 12 9 1 Index Here s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual You can use it to quickly find something you want to read LLLI PONTIAC GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem PONTIAC the PONTIAC Emblem and the name GRAND PRIX are registered t
315. you continue to experience nuisance alarms you may want to try turning off damage detection by programming the Content Theft Deterrent to mode 2 see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index If you are still having trouble with nuisance alarms you can turn off the Content Theft Deterrent system by programming the Content Theft Deterrent to mode 3 see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index See the dealer or a qualified technician for service 2 25 New Vehicle Break In NOTICE Your vehicle doesn t need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines Don t drive at any one speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Don t make full throttle starts Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time your new brake linings aren t yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings Don t tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer in the Index for more information 2 26 yellow blue Ignition Positions Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons A child or others could be injured or even killed They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move Don t leave the keys in the vehicle with children T
316. ystem back on at any time by pressing the button again The traction control system warning light should go off Enhanced Traction System 3100 V6 or 3800 V6 Engine Your vehicle may have an Enhanced Traction System ETS that limits wheel spin This is especially useful in slippery road conditions The system operates only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction When this happens the system reduces engine power and may also upshift the transaxle to limit wheel spin This light will come on when your Enhanced Traction System is limiting wheel spin See Enhanced Traction System Warning Light in the Index LOW TRAC If your vehicle is in cruise control when the enhanced traction system begins to limit wheel spin the cruise control will automatically disengage When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may reengage the cruise control See Cruise Control in the Index The Enhanced Traction System operates in all transaxle shift lever positions But the system can upshift the transaxle only as high as the shift lever position you ve chosen so you should use the lower gears only when necessary See Automatic Transaxle in the Index This TRAC OFF warning light will come on to let you know if there s a problem TRAC OFF See Enhanced Traction System Warning Light in the Index When this warning light is on the system will not limit wheel spin

The 1999 Pontiac Grand Prix Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents